Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works

Section-2-Technical Specifications

INDEX

Sl.No. Section Number Description of items

1. Section-1 General Specifications

2. Section-2 Dismantling and Demolition works

3. Section-3 Earth work Excavation

4. Section-4 Anti termite treatment

5. Section-5 PCC, RCC and RMC works

6. Section-6 Form work

7. Section-7 Steel reinforcement works

8. Section-8 Structural steel works

9. Section-9 Brick, Stone, CC and ACC block masonry works

10. Section-10 Plastering and painting works

11. Section-11 Joinery works

12. Section-12 Flooring works

13. Section-13 Water proofing works

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 1

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-1: GENERAL SPECIFICATION

1.1. GENERAL

1.1.1. The detailed specifications given hereafter are for the items of works described in the
schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper execution of work to
the required standards.

1.1.2. It may also be noted that the specification are of generalized nature and these shall be read
in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities and drawings.

1.1.3. The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly
intended and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for
the entire completion in accordance with standard engineering practice.

1.1.4. The Owner shall be the sole deciding authority as to the meaning; interpretations and
implication for various provisions of the specifications and his decision in writing shall be
final and binding on all concerned.

1.1.5. In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the description in the
schedule of quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence.

1.1.6. In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the drawing, the
specification shall take precedence.

1. 1.7. Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable latest codes and standards
published by the Bureau of Indian Standards and all other standards, shall govern in all
respects of design, workmanship, quality, properties of materials, method of testing and
method of measurements.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK

The work to be carried out under the Contract shall consist of the various items as generally
described in the Tender Documents as well as in the Bill of Quantities furnished in the Tender
Documents. The works to be performed shall also include all general works preparatory to
the construction of civil, structural, architectural, finishing and water proofing works. The
work shall include work of any kind necessary for the due and satisfactory construction,
completion and maintenance of the works to the intent and meaning of the drawings and
these specifications and further drawings and orders that may be issued by the Owner/PMC
from time to time. The scope of work shall include compliance by the Contractor with all
general conditions of contract, whether specifically mentioned or not in the various clauses
of these specifications, all materials, apparatus, plant, equipment, tools, fuel, water,
strutting, timbering, transport, offices, stores, workshop, staff, labour and the provision of
proper and sufficient protective works, diversions, temporary fencing lighting. It shall also
include safety of workers, first-aid equipment, suitable accommodation for the staff and
workmen, with adequate sanitary arrangements, the effecting on maintenance of all
insurance, the payment of all wages, salaries, fees, royalties, duties or other charges arising
out of the erection of works and the regular clearance of rubbish, reinstatement and clearing

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 2

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

up of the site as may be required completion of works safety of the public and protection of
the works and adjoining land, structures properties etc.

The contractor shall ensure that all actions are taken to build in quality assurance in the
planning and execution of works. The quality assurance shall cover all stages of work such as
setting out, selection of materials, selection of construction methods, selection of equipment
and plant, deployment of personnel and supervisory staff, quality control testing, etc. The
work of building in quality assurance shall be deemed to be covered in the scope of the
work.

The Contractor shall furnish, at least 15 days in advance, his program of commencement of
item of work, the method of working he intends to adopt for various items of work. He shall
provide information regarding the details of the method of working, and equipment he
proposes to employ and satisfy the Owner/PMC about the adequacy and safety of the same.
The sole responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the method adopted by the Contractor
will, however, rest on the Contractor, irrespective of any approval given by the Owner/PMC.

The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in the
Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the safety code and the provision of the
safety rules as specified in the General Conditions of the Contract for ensuring safety of men
and materials.

Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the

Owner/PMC, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation regarding
adequacy, correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality, workmanship, etc.

1.3. CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The Contract Drawings provided for tendering purposes shall be as contained in the Tender
Documents and shall be used as a reference and for guidance only.

The Contractor should visualize the nature and type of work contemplated and ensure that
the rates and prices quoted by him in the Bill of Quantities have due consideration of the
qualitative and quantitative variations, as may be found at the site and complexities of work
involved during actual execution/construction.

The Contract drawings will also include any other drawings which the Owner/PMC may issue
from time to time during the currency of the contract.

“Issued for Construction” drawings will be issued to the Contractor during the progress of
the work and as further data becomes available to supplement the tender drawings. “Issued
for Construction” drawings will be revised and fresh revised copies issued to the Contractor
from time to time by the Owner/PMC to adopt the work to the final designs and to suit the
physical conditions encountered during the progress of the work. “Issued for Construction”
drawings as issued by the Owner/PMC shall form part of this specification. Unless otherwise

specified, the plans and specifications are intended to include everything obviously requisite
and necessary for the proper and entire completion of the work and accordingly the work

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 3

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

shall be carried out in completeness as required whether each item is mentioned herein or
not.

It shall be understood that drawings furnished to the Contractor shall be interpreted by the
use of given dimensions, and nomenclature only, and that the drawing shall not be scaled.
Figured dimensions on drawings are in all cases to be accepted in preference to scaled sizes
and drawings to a large scale shall take precedence over those to smaller scale drawings. In
case of discrepancy the Contractor shall ask for clarification before proceeding with the
work. All dimensions shall be checked on site prior to execution.

In case of difference between drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern.
Anything mentioned in the specifications, and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the
drawings and not mentioned in specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned
in both.

Shop drawings consisting of such detailed drawings as are not included in the contract
drawings or larger scale details of certain parts of the work indicated on the contract
drawings, shall be complete and shall contain all required detailed information as may be
reasonably required for satisfactory execution of the work. Prior to submittal for approval,
the Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly checking all drawings whether prepared
by him or by his sub-contractors to ensure that they comply with the intent and the
requirements of the contract specifications, and that they fit in with the overall building
layout.

Examination and/or approval by the Owner/PMC of any drawing or other drawings or other
documents submitted by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities or liabilities under the contract.

The approval of the drawings by the Owner/PMC shall not be construed as a complete
dimensional check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction and
detailing is satisfactory. Approval of such drawings will not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for any errors or compliance with requirements of the contract plans and
specifications not will any discrepancy between shop drawings and contract plans, and
specifications constitute a basis for deviation from the requirements of the contract plans,
and specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensions and design of
adequate connections, supports details and satisfactory construction of the work, any
fabrication, erection setting or other work done in advance of the receipt of approved
drawings shall be done entirely at the Contractor’s risk. Approval of the shop drawings shall
not be construed as authorizing additional work or increased costs to the Owner. Adjustment
in the bid price or any extension of time to cover required changes in the shop drawings to
comply with the requirements of the contract specifications shall not be permitted.

The tendered rates/prices for the work shall be deemed to include the cost of preparation,
supply and delivery of all necessary drawings, prints, tracings and negatives which the
contractor is required to provide in accordance with the contract

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 4

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

1.4. SITE INFORMATION

The Contractor shall visit the construction site and examine himself thoroughly the site
condition and satisfy himself as to the nature of the existing roads or other means of
communications, the character of the soil and the excavations, the extent and magnitude of
the work and facilities for obtaining materials and shall obtain generally his own information
on all matters affecting the execution of the work. No extra charges made in consequence of
any misunderstanding or incorrect information on any of these points or on the grounds of
insufficient description will be allowed. All expenses incurred by the Contractor in connection
with obtaining information for submitting this tender including his visits to the site or efforts
in compiling the tender shall be borne by the bidder and no claims for reimbursement
thereof shall be entertained.

1.5. SETTING OUT

The Contractor shall set out the works. Owner will provide one permanent mark in the
vicinity of the plant for reference. All further laying out work, temporary bench -mark, grid
pillars etc. shall be carried out accurately by the Contractor and maintained till the end of the
job.

The work of setting out construction of permanent / temporary pillars etc; shall be deemed
to be a part of general works preparatory to the execution of work and no separate payment
shall be made for the same.

1.6. MATERIALS

The relevant standards for materials, as well as the testing procedures, have been indicated
at appropriate places in the Specifications. Materials shall be of approved quality and the
best of their kind available and shall generally conform to I. S. Specifications. The Contractor
shall order all the materials required for the execution of work as early as necessary and
ensure that such materials are on site well ahead of requirement for use in the work.

All material brought on the site of work by Contractor meant to be used in the same, shall be
as per the specification and to the approval of the Owner/PMC.

The Contractor shall obtain the Owner/PMC’s approval for samples of all materials to be
used in the works and shall deposit these samples with him before placing an order for the
materials with suppliers. The materials brought on the works, shall conform in every respect
to their approved samples, fresh samples shall be deposited with Owner/PMC whenever
type or source of any material changes.

The Contractor shall check each fresh consignment of materials as it is brought to the site of
works to see that they conform in all respects to the specifications of the samples approved
by the Owner/PMC.

The Owner/PMC will have the option to have any of the materials tested to find out whether
they are in accordance with the specification and the Contractor will bear all expenses for
such testing.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 5

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Any materials that have not been found to conform to the specification will be rejected
forthwith and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost.

The Owner/PMC shall have power to cause the Contractor to purchase and use such
materials from any particular source, as may in his opinion be necessary for the proper
execution of the work.

1.7. STORAGE OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall store cement on site in a weatherproof and leak proof shed and the
shed shall hold atleast 3months requirement. The Contractor shall store all the other
materials in a proper manner to avoid contamination and deterioration, at places at site
approved by the Owner/PMC and protect from sun, wind, rain or other natural causes.
Should the place where the Contractor stores material be required by the Owner for any
other purpose, the Contractor shall forthwith remove the material from that place at his own
cost and clear the place for the use of the Owner.

The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for storing water, if necessary, in
Underground sump or tanks or cisterns, to the approval of the Owner/PMC. Care shall be
exercised to see that water is not contaminated in any way.

1.8. WORKMANSHIP

The work-involved calls for high standard of workmanship combined with speed and to the
entire satisfaction of the Owner/PMC.

All works shall be true to level, plumb and square and the corners, edges and arises in all
cases shall be unbroken and neat.

Any work not to the satisfaction of the Owner/PMC or his representative will be rejected and
the same shall be rectified, or removed and replaced with work of the required standard of
workmanship at no extra cost.

Child Labour is strictly prohibited.

1.9. PLANT

The Contractor will be required to provide and maintain in working order the power driven
equipments required during the construction work.

In addition to the general conditions indicated in the Contract Documents, the following
conditions regarding use of equipment in works shall be satisfied:

The Contractor shall be required to give a trial run of the equipment for establishing their
capability to achieve the laid down Specifications and tolerances to the satisfaction of the
Owner/PMC before commencement of the work;

All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and shall be operated and maintained

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 6

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

at all times in a manner acceptable to the Owner/PMC;

All the plant/equipment to be deployed on the works shall be got approved from the
Owner/PMC for ensuring their fitness and efficiency before commencement of work
/equipment, operators, drivers should have valid license.

Any material or equipment not meeting the approval of the Owner/PMC shall be removed
from the site forthwith;

No equipment will be removed from site without permission of the Owner/PMC; and

The Contractor shall also make available the equipment for site quality control work as
directed by the Owner/PMC.

One passenger vehicle with well experienced drivers should be kept at site on 24x7 hours
basis as ambulance.

1.10. POLLUTION AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment during the
course of the construction of the works. He shall abide by all laws, rules and regulations in
force governing pollution and environmental protection that are applicable in the area
where the works are situated.

The Contractor must take all reasonable steps to minimize dust nuisance during the
construction of the works.

1.11. METHODOLOGY AND SEQUENCE OF WORK

Prior to start of the construction activities at site, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner/PMC for approval, the detailed construction methodology including mechanical
equipment proposed to be used, sequence of various activities and schedule from start to
end of the project.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 7

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

1.12. TESTING OF WORK AND MATERIALS

The Contractor shall, if required by the Owner/PMC, arrange to test materials and / or
portions of the works at his own cost in order to prove their soundness and efficiency. If
after any such test the work or portion of works is found in the opinion of the Owner/PMC
to be defective or unsound, the Contractor shall pull down and redo the same at his own
cost. Defective materials shall immediately be removed from the site.

1.13. FIELD LABORATORY

An adequately equipped field laboratory as required for site control on the quality of
materials and the works shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor till the
completion of works. The rates quoted for all the items of work shall include for the
provision and maintenance of field laboratory.

Description

The Contractor shall provide fully furnished and adequately equipped field laboratory
constructed as shown in drawings or as directed. The field laboratory shall preferably be
located adjacent to the site office of the Owner/PMC and provided with amenities like water
supply, electric supply etc.

The floor space requirement for the field laboratory shall be as indicated in the drawing or
as directed. It shall include one room for use of staff of Owner, one room for Contractor
staff and a store for the storage of samples. The remaining space shall be provided for the
installation of equipment, laboratory tables and cupboards, working space for carrying out
various laboratory tests, besides a wash basin, toilet facility and a curing tank for the curing
of samples, around 4 m x 2 m x 1 m in size and a fume chamber.

Required furniture and furnishing shall be provided in the laboratory.

The Contractor shall maintain the field laboratory in a satisfactory manner till the
completion of work.

There shall be no separate payment for the facility as it is required for site control on quality
of materials and the works.

The Contractor shall include in his rates for all the facilities.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 8

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The following items of laboratory equipment shall be provided in the field laboratory.

General

(i) Oven - Electrically operated, thermostatically controlled, range upto 1 No.

200oC sensitivity 1oC
(ii) Platform balance 300 Kg. capacity 1 No.
(iii) Balance 20 Kg. capacity-self indicating type 1 No.
(iv) Electronic Balance 5 Kg. capacity accuracy 0.5 gm 2 Nos.
(v) Water bath-electrically operated and thermostatically controlled with 1 No.
adjustable shelves, sensitivity 1oC
(vi) Thermometers:
Mercury-in-glass thermometer range 4 Nos
0o to 250oC
Mercury-in-steel thermometer with 30 cm stem, range upto 300 oC
(vii) Kerosene or gas stove or electric hot plate 1 No.
(viii) Glassware, spatulas, wire gauzes, steel scales, measuring tape,
casseroles, Kara his, enameled trays of assorted sizes, pestle-mortar, As
porcelain dishes, gunny bags, plastic bags, chemicals, digging tools like required
pickaxes, shovels etc.
(ix) Set of IS sieves with lid and pan: 1 Set
450 mm diameter:
63 mm, 53 mm, 37.5 mm, 26.5 mm, 13.2 mm, 9.5 mm 6.7 mm and
4.75 mm size
200 mm diameter: 2 Sets
2.36 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 425 micron, 300 micron, 150
micron and 75 micron
(x) Water testing kit 1 Set
(xi) First aid box 1 Set

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 9

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

For soils and aggregates:

(i) Riffle Box 1 No.
(ii) Atterberg Limits (liquid and plastic limits) determination apparatus 1 Set

(iii) Compaction Test Equipment both 2.5 Kg and 4.5 Kg rammers (Light 1 Set
and Heavy comp active efforts)
(iv) Dry Bulk Density Test apparatus (sand pouring cylinder, tray can etc.) 1 Set
complete
(v) Speedy Moisture Meter complete with chemicals 1 Set
(vi) Post-hole Auger with extensions 1 Set
(vii) Core cutter apparatus 10 cm dia. 10/15 cm height, complete with 1 Set
dolly, rammer etc.
(viii) Aggregate Impact Value Test apparatus / Los Angles Abrasion Test 1 Set
apparatus
(ix) Flakiness and Elongation Test Gauges 1 Set
(x) Standard measures of 30, 15 and 3 liters capacity along with standard 1 Set
tamping rod.
(xi) California Bearing Ratio test apparatus 1 Set
(xii) Unconfirmed compression test apparatus 1 Set
For bitumen and bituminous mixes:
(i) Penetrometer with standard needles 1 Set
(ii) Riffle box - small size 1 No.
(iii) Centrifuge type bitumen extractor, hand operated, complete with 1 Set
petrol/commercial benzenes
(iv) Marshall stability test apparatus, complete with all accessories
1 Set
(v) Field density bottle along with cutting tray, chisel, hammer and 2 Nos.
standard sand
(vi) 3 m straight edge 1 No.
(vii) Camber board 1 No
(viii) Core cutting machine with 10 cm dia. diamond cutting edge 1 Set
(ix) Vacuum pump and 3 specific gravity bottles 1 Set
For cement and cement concrete:
(i) Vicat apparatus for testing setting times 1 Set
(ii) Slump testing apparatus 4 Sets
(iii) Compression and Flexural strength testing machine of 200 tonne 1 No.
capacity with additional dial for flexural testing
(iv) Needle Vibrator 2 Nos.
(v) Air Meter 1 No.
(vi) Vibrating hammer for vibrating dry mix as for Dry Lean Cement
concrete sub-base 1 No.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 10

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Note:

The items and their numbers listed above in this Clause shall be decided by the Owner/PMC
as per requirements of the Project and modified accordingly.

1.14. PROTECTION

The Contractor shall properly cover up and protect all work throughout the duration of work
until completion, particularly masonry, arises, moulding, steps, terrazzo or special floor
finishes, staircases and balustrades, doors and window frames, plaster angles / corners
lighting and sanitary fittings, glass, paint work and all finishing.

1.15. CLEARING OF SITE

The Contractor shall after completion of the work clear the site of all debris and left over
materials at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner/PMC and Municipal or
other public authorities.

1.16. PREPARATION OF BUILDING FOR OCCUPATION

The whole of the work shall be thoroughly inspected by the Contractor and all deficiencies
and defects put right. On completion of such inspection, the Contractor shall inform the
Owner/PMC in writing that he has finished the work and it is ready for the Owner/PMC
inspection.

On completion, the Contractor shall clean all windows and doors and all glass panes,
including cleaning of all floors, staircases and every part of the building including oiling of all
hardware. He will leave the entire building neat and clean and ready for immediate
occupation and to the satisfaction of the Owner/PMC.

-------End of Section-1-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 11

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-2-DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION WORKS:

2.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

The specification describes the scope of works under this sub-head for dismantling and
demolition of brick/cc block masonry in cement / lime mortar, plain cement concrete works,
reinforced cement concrete works, wooden frames and shutters of doors, windows, steel or
aluminium windows.

2.2. GENERAL:

The term Dismantling implies carefully taking up or down and removing without damage.
This shall consist of dismantling one or more parts of the building as specified or shown in
the drawings. The term Demolition implies taking up or down or breaking up. This shall
consist of demolishing whole or part of work including all relevant items as specified shown
in drawings.

2.3. PRECAUTIONS:

Necessary propping, shoring and/or underpinning shall be provided for the safety of the
adjoining work or property, which is to be left in-tact, before dismantling and demolishing is
taken up and the work shall be carried out in such a way that no damages are caused to the
adjoining work or property. Wherever required, temporary enclosures or partitions are to
be provided. Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep the dust- nuisance down as and
when necessary. Dismantling shall be commenced in a systematic manner. All materials
which are likely to be damaged by dropping from a height or demolishing roofs, masonry
etc., shall be carefully dismantled first. The dismantled articles shall be passed by hand
where necessary and lowered to the ground and not thrown. The materials then be properly
stacked as directed by the Client/PMC. All materials obtained from dismantling or
demolition shall be the property of the Government unless otherwise specified and shall be
kept in safe custody until handed over to the Client/PMC. Any serviceable material, obtained
during dismantling or demolition shall be separated out and stacked properly as indicated
by the Client/PMC within a lead of 150 m. or as specified in the item. All under serviceable
materials, rubbish etc. shall be disposed off as directed by the Client/PMC.

2. 4. TREATMENT:

All the dismantled area shall be rendered clean off all debris and dust etc. The sides of
jambs, sills, soffits etc. of the openings if any, after taking out doors and window frames or
styles, unless and otherwise to be treated, shall be plastered in C.M. 1:3 with smooth finish
to render true sides, corners, edges etc.

2.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

2.5.1. Brick Masonry & R.C.C. Works: The measurement of brick masonry with or without
plaster/painting shall be taken correct to a centimetre and volume calculated in cubic
metres up to two places of decimal.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 12

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

2.5.2. Doors and Windows:

Dismantling of doors and windows (wooden, steel or aluminium glazed) shall be

enumerated. Removal of wooden frames or styles shall include (unless otherwise separately
mentioned for removing shutters only), the removal of shutters along with architraves, glass
panels, beadings, fittings and fastenings along with frames.

2.6. RATES:

The rate shall include cost of all operations mentioned above including necessary labour,
materials, transport, scaffolding, stacking the serviceable materials, disposing the
unserviceable materials within the lead specified, all as directed by the Client/PMC.

-------End of Section-2-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 13

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-3-EARTH WORK EXCAVATION:

3.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

3.1.1. This specification describes the general requirements of earth work in excavation works in
different materials, site grading, filling in areas as shown in drawing, filling back in and
around the foundations and disposal of surplus soil and or stacking them properly as per
drawings and as per the directions given by Client/PMC’s Client / PMC and all operations
covered within the intent and purpose of this specification.

3. 1.2. For carrying out earth work excavation in different type of soils, conveyance and disposal of
surplus soil and or stacking them properly in the location as directed, the contractor shall
furnish all equipments, tools, tackles, plants, instruments, qualified supervising staffs,
labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables and everything necessary, whether or
not such items are particularly specified herein this document for completion of the work in
accordance with the specification requirements in bill of quantities.

3.1.3. Contractor shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set properly all lines
and establish levels for various works such as earthwork in excavation for grading,
basement, foundations, plinth fillings, roads, drains cable trenches, pipelines etc. such
survey shall be carried out by taking accurate cross sections of the area perpendicular to
established reference/grid lines at a 6metres intervals or nearer as determined by the Client

/ PMC based on ground profile. These shall be checked by the Client / PMC and therein after
properly recorded.

3.1.4. The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This hall also include, wherever
required, proper shoring to maintain excavation and also the furnishing, erecting and
maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night for
ensuring safety.

3.1.5. The rates quoted shall also include for dumping of excavated materials in regular heaps,
bunds, and riprap with regular slope as directed by the Client / PMC within the lead
specified and leveling the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/ soil excavated shall
be stacked properly as directed by the Client / PMC. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid
along the centre of the heaps, the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the
casing on the sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately.

3.2. APPLICABLE CODES:

The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be applicable.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 14

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:965:1963 Specification for equivalent metric units for scales,
dimensions and quantities in general construction work
2. IS:1200:Part1:1992 Methods of measurement of building and civil
engineering works: Part 1 Earthwork
3. IS:2720:Part1:1983 Methods of Test for Soils - Part 1 : Preparation of Dry Soil
Samples for Various Tests
4. IS:2720:Part2:1973 Methods of test for soils: Part 2 Determination of water
content
5. IS:2720:Part7:1980 Methods of Test for Soils - Part 7 : Determination of
Water Content-Dry Density Relation Using Light
Compaction
6. IS:2720:Part8:1983 Methods of Test for Soils - Part 8 : Determination of
Water Content-Dry Density Relation Using Heavy
Compaction
7. IS:2720:Part25:1982 Methods of test for soils: Part 25 Determination silica
sesquioxide ratio
8. IS:2720:Part28:1974 Methods of test for soils: Part 28 Determination of dry
density of soils in place, by the sand replacement method
9. IS:2720:Part29:1975 Methods of Test for Soils - Part 29 : Determination of Dry
Density of Soils In-place by the Core-cutter Method
10. IS:3764:1992 Code of safety for excavation work
11. IS:4081:1986 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations
12. IS:4082:1996 Recommendations on stacking and storage of
construction materials and components at site
13. IS:9759:1981 Guidelines for de-watering during construction

3.3. DRAWING:

3.3.1. Client / PMC will furnish drawings wherever in their opinion such drawings are required to
show areas to be excavated/ filled, sequence of priorities etc.; contractor shall follow strictly
such drawings.

3.4. SITE CLEARANCE:

3.4.1. The area to be excavated/ filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs, stumps, bush,
vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc. and other objectionable matter with the permission of the
Client / PMC. If any roots or stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall also be
removed. The material so removed shall be burnt or disposed off as directed by the Client /
PMC. Where earth fills is intended, the area shall be stripped of all loose/ soft patches, top
soil containing objectionable matter/ materials before fill commence.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 15

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

3.5. PRECIOUS OBJECTS, RELICS, OBJECTS OF ANTEQUITY, ETC.:

3.5.1. All gold, silver oil, minerals, archaeological and other findings of importance, trees cut or
other materials of any description and all precious stones, coins, treasures, relics, antiquities
and other similar things which may be found in or upon the site shall be the property of the
Client and the contractor shall duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the Client and
from time to time deliver the same to such person or persons as the Client may from time to
time authorize or appoint to receive the same.

3.6. CLASSIFICATION OF EARTH WORK:

3.6.1. All materials to be excavated shall be classified by the Client / PMC, into one of the following
classes and shall be paid for at the rate tendered for that particular class of material. No
distinction shall be made whether the material is dry, moist or wet. The decision of the
Client / PMC regarding the classification of the material shall be final and binding on
contractor and not be a subject matter of appeal or arbitration.

3.6.2. The earth work will be classified under any of the following categories:

3.6.2.1. Ordinary & Hard Soils:

3.6.2.1.1. These shall include all kinds of soils containing kankar, sand, silt, murrum and/ or shingle,
gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale, etc., which can generally be excavated by spade, pick
axes and shovel and which is not classified under soft and decomposed rock” and “hard
rock” defined below. This shall also include embedded rock boulders not longer than one
metre in any direction and not more than 200mm in any one of the other two directions.

3.6.2.2. Soft and Decomposed Rock:

3.6.2.2.1. This shall include rock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard mica schist, laterite and all other
materials which in the opinion of the Client / PMC is rock, but does not need blasting and
could be removed with picks, hammer, crow bars, wedges and pneumatic breaking
equipment. The more fact that contractor resorts to blasting for reasons of his own shall not
qualify for classification under hard rock.

3.6.2.2.2. This shall also include excavation in macadam and tarred roads, pavements and rock
boulders not longer than one metre in any direction and not more than 500mm in any one
of the other two directions. Masonry to be dismantled will also be measured under this
item.

3.6.2.3. HARD ROCK:

3.6.2.3.1. This shall include all rock occurring in large continuous masses, which cannot be removed
except by blasting for loosening it. Harder varieties of rock with or without veins and
secondary minerals, which in the opinion of the Client / PMC required blasting, shall be
considered as hard rock. Boulders of rock occurring in such sizes and not classified
under3.6.2.1 and 3.6.2.2 above shall also be classified as hard rock. Concrete work both

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 16

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

reinforced and unreinforced to be dismantled will be measured under this item, unless a
separate provision is made in the schedule of quantities.

3.7. EXCAVATION:

3.7.1. All excavation work shall be carried out be mechanical equipments unless in the opinion of
the Client / PMC the work involved and time schedule permit manual work.

3.7.2. Excavation for permanent work shall be carried out strictly to the dimensions given in the
drawing or as specified by the Client / PMC. Rough excavation shall be carried out to a depth
300 to 150mm above the final excavation level. The balance shall be excavated with special
care. Soft pockets shall be removed even below the final level and extra excavation filled up
as directed by the Client / PMC. The final excavation if so instructed by the Client / PMC
should be carried out just prior to laying the mudmat.

3.7.3. The contractor may excavate outside the lines shown on the drawing or as directed by the
Client / PMC for facility of work or similar other reasons and also backfill later at his own
cost if so approved by the Client / PMC. The excavation if any be taken below the specified
elevations, the contractor shall fill it up with concrete of the same grade as in the
foundation resting thereon upto the required elevation, at his cost. No extra shall be
claimed by the contractor on this account.

3.7.4. All excavations shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety and working
facility. Prior approval of Client / PMC shall be obtained by the contractor in each individual
case for the method he proposes to adopt for the excavation, including dimensions, side
slopes, dewatering, disposal, etc. However, this approval shall not in any way relieve the
contractor of his responsibility for any consequent loss or damage. The excavation must be
carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner. Side slopes shall be as steep as will
stand safely for the actual soil conditions encountered. Every precaution shall be taken to
prevent slips. Should slips occur the slipped material shall be removed and the slope dressed
to a modified stable slope. Removal of the slipped earth will not be paid for if the slips are
due to the negligence of the contractor.

3.7.5. Excavation shall be carried out with such tools, tackles and equipments as described herein
before. Blasting or other methods may be resorted to in the case of hard rock, however not
without the specific permission of the Client / PMC.

3.7.6. The Client / PMC may also direct that in some extreme cases the rock may be excavated by
heating and sudden quenching for splitting the rock. Firewood shall be used for burning and
payment shall be made for such work as called for in the schedule of quantities.

3.7.7. STRIPPING LOOSE ROCK:

3.7.7.1. All loose boulders, semi detached rocks (along with earthy stuff which might move
therewith) not directly in the excavation but so close to the area to be excavated as to be
liable in the opinion of the Client / PMC to fall or otherwise endanger the workmen,
equipment, or the work, etc. shall be stripped off and removed away from the area of the

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 17

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

excavation. The method used shall be such as not to shatter or render unstable or unsafe
the portion which was originally sound and safe.
3.7.8. EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK:

3.7.8.1. Unless otherwise stated herein, I.S.specifications IS:4031 (Safety Code for Blasting and
Related Drilling Operations) shall be followed. After removal of overburden, if any,
excavation shall be continued in rock to such widths, lengths, depths and profiles as are
shown on the drawings or such other lines and grades as may be specified by the Client /
PMC. As far as possible all blasting shall be completed prior to commencement of
construction. At all stages of excavation precautions shall be taken to preserve the rock
below and beyond the lines specified for the excavation in the soundest possible condition.
The quantity and strength of explosive used shall be such as, will neither damage nor crack
the rock outside the limits of excavation. All precautions as directed by the Client / PMC
shall be taken during the blasting operations and care shall be taken that no damage is
caused to adjoining buildings or structures as a result of blasting operations. In case of
damage to permanent or temporary structures the contractor shall repair the same to the
satisfaction of the Client / PMC at his cost. As excavation approaches its final lines and levels
the depth of the charge holes and amount of explosives used shall be progressively and
suitably reduced.

3.7.8.2. Specific written permission of the Client / PMC will have to be taken by the contractor for
blasting rock. The contractor shall also obtain a valid blasting license from the authorities
concerned. If permission for blasting is refused by the Client / PMC the rock shall be
removed by wedging, pick, barring, heating and quenching or other approved means. All
loose or loosened rock in the sides shall be removed by barring, wedging, etc. The unit rates
for excavation in hard rock shall include the cost of all these operations.

3.7.8.3. The contractor shall also obtain necessary license for storage and use of explosives for the
work from the authorities dealing with explosives. The fees, if any, required for obtaining
such license shall be borne by the contractor. The contractor shall have to make necessary
storage facilities for the explosives as per rules of local, state and central government
authorities and statutory bodies/ regulations. Explosives shall be kept dry and shall not be
exposed to direct rays of sun or be stored in the vicinity of fire, stoves, steam pipes or
heated metal etc. No explosive shall be brought near the work in excess of quantity required
for a particular amount of firing to be done and surplus left after filling the holes shall be
removed to the magazine. The magazine should be built as far as possible from the area to
be blasted. The Client / PMC’s prior approval shall be taken for the location proposed for the
magazine.

3.7.8.4. In no case blasting shall be allowed closer than 30metres to any structure or to locations
where concrete has just been placed. In the latter case the concrete must be at least 7days
old.

3.7.8.5. For blasting operation the following points shall be observed:

3.7.8.5.1. The contractor shall employ competent and experienced supervisor an licensed Blaster -In
charge of each set of operation who shall be held personally responsible to ensure that all
safety regulations are carried out.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 18

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

3.7.8.5.2. Before any blasting is carried out the contractor shall intimate the Client / PMC and obtain
his approval in writing for resorting to such operations. He shall intimate the hours of firing
charges, the nature of explosive to be used and the precautions taken for ensuring safety.

3.7.8.5.3. The contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site are excluded from an
area within radius of 200metres from the firing point at least 15minutes before firing time
by sounding warning siren. The area shall be encircled by red flags. Clearance signal shall
also be sounding a distinguishing siren.

3.7.8.5.4. The blasting of rock near any existing buildings, equipment or any other property shall be
done under cover and the contractor has to make all such necessary muffling arrangements
as stated hereinafter under “Controlled Blasting”. Blasting shall be done with small charges
only and where directed by the Client / PMC. A trench shall have to be cut by chiseling prior
to the blasting operation separating the area under blasting from the existing structures.

3.7.8.5.5. The firing shall be supervised by a supervisor. If the blasts do not tally with the number fired,
the misfired holes shall be carefully located after half an hour and when located, the same
shall be exploded by drilling a fresh hole along the misfired hole (but not nearer than
600mm from it) and by exploding a new charge.

3.7.8.5.6. A wooden tamping rod with a flat shall be used to push cartridges home and metal rod or
hammer shall not be permitted. The charge shall be placed firmly into place and not
rammed or pounded. After a hole is filled to the required depth, the balance of the hole
shall be filled with stemming which may consist of sand or stone dust or similar inert
material.

3.7.8.5.7. The contractor shall preferably fire the explosives electrically.

3.7.8.5.8. Holes for charging explosive shall be drilled with pneumatic drills, the drilling pattern being
so planned that rock pieces after blasting will be suitable for handling without secondary
blasting.

3.7.8.5.9. When excavation has almost reached the desired level hand trimming shall have to be done
for dressing the surface to the desired level. Any rock excavation beyond an over break limit
of 225mm shall be filled up as instructed by the Client / PMC with concrete of mix 1:3:6. The
cost of filling such excess depth shall be borne by the contractor and the excavation carried
out beyond the limit specified above will not be paid for. Stepping in rock excavation shall
be done by hand trimming.

3.7.8.5.10. The contractor shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or Client’s property
due to blasting operations. Contractor shall also be responsible for strict observance of rules
laid down by Inspector of Explosives or any other Authority duly constituted under the state
and/ or central government.

3.7.8.6. CONTROLLED BLASTING INSTRUCTIONS:

3.7.8.6.1. Rock blasting shall be carefully controlled so that rock pieces do not fly out of the pits and
thus endanger the installations around. Contractor shall follow the detailed procedure as
given below and carefully watch the blasting operations. Based on observations he should

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 19

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

set his norms for quantities of charge, depth of holes etc. in consultation with the Client /
PMC within the limits specified below.

3.7.8.6.2. Material for the charge shall be either gun powder or gelatin. The ingredients of the gun
powder shall be of best available quality. The composition shall be as per manufacturer’s
specification meant specifically for rock blasting. The same shall be best make and
approved by the Client / PMC before actual use.

3.7.8.6.3. Quantity of charge: Initially 75 to 80mm of charge fill shall be used an observation made
whether blasting is under full control. If necessary, charge may be gradually increased to
150mm.

Depth of hole 1500 to 1650mm.

Diametre of hole 30 to 40mm.
Embedment of fuse Fuse end shall be embedded to a depth of Inside
charge : ½ to 2/3 of the depth of the charge.
Distance of firing end of the Fuse 15 to 30 metres.
from the charge
Time of the blast after firing the 120 to 150 seconds.
fuse
Disposition of hole 1.20 to 1.80 metre apart both ways
Inclination Inclination of the hole to be pointed towards the non-
developed side of the site.
Number of holes to be taken Up Minimum 8 Numbers and Maximum 20Numbers.
per blast

3.7.8.6.4. Protective Measures:

3.7.8.6.4.1. The holes are to be covered with 3.0mm thick square steel plate of minimum area from
0.60m2 to 1.00m2.

3.7.8.6.4.2. A steel mesh made out of reinforcement rods of not less than 20mm diametre @ 150mm
centers both ways shall be placed over the steel plates.

3.7.8.6.4.3. Six to eight layers of sand filled bags shall be placed over the mesh suitably covering the
whole region under blasting operations.

3.7.8.6.4.4. The steel mesh shall be inspected after every operation and all twist shall be removed
before reuse to the satisfaction of the Client / PMC.

3.7.8.6.5. FEEDING THE CHARGE:

3.7.8.6.5.1. At the bottom of the hole 50 to 75mm depth shall be filled with dry powder.

3.7.8.6.5.2. Then the gun powder shall be fed into the hole to the desired length and lightly tamped with
a rod.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 20

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

3.7.8.6.5.3. The fuse wire shall then be inserted to a depth of ½ to 2/3 of the charge.

3.7.8.6.5.4. The rest of the hole shall then be filled with dry brick powder or dry murrum.

3.7.8.6.6. Precautions to be taken when the water table is encountered:

3.7.8.6.6.1. When the drilled hole encounters water, the charge shall be fed into a steel tube or a plastic
tube and inserted to the bottom of the hole.

3.7.8.6.6.2 In case the contractor prefers to use gelatin for blasting wherever water table is
encountered, the method of blasting and the quantity of charge shall be got approved from
the Client / PMC before proceeding with the work.

3.7.8.7. Particular care should be taken to preserve rock below and beyond excavation limits in
soundest possible manner. Rough excavation should be carried out 150 to 300mm above
the final excavation level. The excavation shall then be done to the specified level with
special care. Over break in the hard rock at bottom beyond 225mm shall not be permitted
and if it is exceeded the same shall have to be made good by the contractor at his own cost
by filling the same with cement concrete of grade not less than 1:3:6.

3.7.8.8. After removal of overburden and thereafter excavation of soft rock if excavation is required
to be continued in rock to such width, lengths, depths and profiles as shown on the drawing
or such other lines and grades as may be specified by the Client / PMC, the excavation in
hard rock shall be done by chiseling if in the opinion of Client / PMC blasting cannot be
permitted.

3.7.8.9. The contractor shall also at his own expenses and without any extra charges make provision
of pumping, bailing and draining water at the ground level to the safe distance so as not to
cause any flooding at site. He shall also keep all foundation pits free of water while the
concreting work is in progress and till the Client / PMC considers it necessary.

3.7.8.10. The rate quoted by the contractor for item of excavation in foundation / excavation over
areas includes removing and disposing of vegetation, grass, cut plantation, shrubs, bushes,
plants, trees of whose girth is not more than 600mm diametre when measured at 1.0 metre
height above ground level. No extra payment / measurement on account of this made.

3.8. FILL AND BACK FILLING:

3.8.1. All fill material will be subjected to the approval of Client / PMC. If any material is rejected
by the Client / PMC the contractor shall remove the same forthwith from the site at no extra
cost to the owner. Surplus fill material shall be deposited /disposed off as directed by the
Client / PMC after the fill work is complete.

3.8.2. No earth fill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been properly
intercepted or otherwise dealt with as directed by the Client / PMC.

3.8.3. To the extent available selected surplus spoils from excavated materials shall be used as
backfill. Fill material shall be free from clods, salts, sulphates, organic or other foreign

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 21

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

material. All clods of earth shall be broken or removed. Where excavated material is mostly
rock, the boulders shall be broken into pieces not larger than 150mm size, mixed with
properly graded fine material consisting of murrum or earth to fill up the mixture used for
filling.

3.8.4. If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed, contractor shall make arrangements
for bringing such material from outside borrow pits. The material and source shall be subject
to prior approval of the Client / PMC. The approved borrow pit area shall be cleared of all
bushes, roots of trees, plants, rubbish etc. Top soil containing salts/ sulphates and other
foreign material shall be removed. The materials so removed shall be burnt or disposed off
as directed by the Client / PMC. The contractor shall make necessary access roads to borrow
areas and maintain the same at his own cost if such access road does not exist.

3.8.5. As soon as the work in foundations has been accepted and measured the spaces around the
foundations, structures, pits, trenches etc. shall be cleared of all debris and filled with
selected/ approved earth in layers not exceeding 150mm each layer being watered, rammed
and properly consolidated before the succeeding one is laid. Each layer shall be consolidated
to the full satisfaction of the Client / PMC. Filled earth shall be rammed with approved
compaction method. Usually no manual compaction shall be allowed unless the Client /
PMC is satisfied that in some cases manual compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The
final back-fill surfaces shall be trimmed and leveled to proper profile as directed by the
Client / PMC of indicated on the drawings.

3.8.6. Filling in trenches for pipes and drains shall be commenced as soon as the joints of pipes and
drains have been tested and approved by the Client / PMC. The backfilling material shall be
properly consolidated by watering and ramming taking due care that no damage is caused
to the pipes.

3.8.7. Where the trenches are excavated in soil the filling from the bottom of the trench to the
level of the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction with selected
approved earth in layers not exceeding 80mm. Backfilling above the level of the centre line
of the pipe shall be done with selected earth by hand compaction of other approved means
in layers not exceeding 150mm.

3.8.8. In case of excavation of trenches in rock the filling upto a level 300mm above the top of the
pipe shall be done with fine materials such as earth, murrum etc. The filling upto the level of
the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction in layers not exceeding 80mm
whereas the filling above the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction or
approved means in layers not exceeding 150mm. The filling from a level 300mm above the
top of the pipe to the top of the trench shall be done by hand or other approved mechanical
methods with broken rock filling of size not exceeding 150mm mixed with fine material as
available to fill up the voids.

3.8.9. The filling in the trenches shall be carried out simultaneously on the sides of the pipe to
avoid unequal pressure on the pipes.

3.8.10. Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described hereinbefore in layers
not exceeding 150mm watered and compacted mechanically. The Client / PMC may

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 22

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

however permit manual compaction by hand tampers in case he is satisfied that mechanical
compaction is not possible. When filling reaches the finished level the surface shall be
flooded with water for at least 24 hours unless otherwise directed by the Client / PMC. The
surfaces shall then be allowed to dry and again compacted as specified above to avoid
settlements at the later stage. The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the
specified level, slope etc.

3.8.11. Site grading shall be carried out as indicated in the drawings and as directed by the Client /
PMC. Any excavation/ filling for site grading shall be carried out as specified in the
specifications given above unless otherwise indicated below:

3.8.11.1. If no compaction is called for the fill may be deposited to the full height in one operation and
leveled. If the fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in layers not exceeding 225mm and
leveled uniformly and compacted as indicated in the specifications given above before the
next layer is deposited.

3.8.11.2. To ensure that the fill has been compacted as specified, if required field and laboratory tests
shall be carried out by owner.

3.8.11.3. Field compaction test shall be carried out at different stages of filling and also after the fill to
the entire height has been completed. This shall hold good for embankment as well.

3.8.11.4. The contractor shall protect the earth fill from being washed away by rain or damaged in any
other way. If any slip occurs the contractor shall remove the affected material and make
good the slip at his own cost.

3.8.11.5. The fill shall be carried out to such dimensions and levels as indicated on the drawings after
the stipulated compaction. The fill will be considered as incomplete if the desired
compaction has not been obtained.

3.8.11.6. If specifically permitted by the Client / PMC compaction can be obtained by allowing loaded
trucks conveying fill or other material to ply over the fill area. Even if such a method is
permitted, it will be for contractor to demonstrate that the desired/ specified compaction
has been obtained. In order that the fill may be reasonably uniform throughout the material
should be dumped in place in approximately uniform layers. Traffic over the fill shall then be
so routed to compact the area uniformly throughout.

3.8.11.7. If so specified the rock as obtained from excavation may be used for filling and leveling to
the indicated grades without further breaking. In such event filling shall be done in layers
not exceeding 500mm approximately. After rock filling to the approximate required level the
void in the rocks shall be filled with finer material such as earth, broken stone etc. and area
flooded so that be taken to ensure that the finer fill material does not get washed out. Over
the layer so filled a 100mm thick mixed layer of broken material and earth shall be laid and
consolidated to the full satisfaction the Client / PMC.

3.9. SAND FILLING:

3.9.1. At some of the places backfilling may have to be carried with local sand if directed by the
Client / PMC. The sand used shall be clean, medium grained and free from impurities. The

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 23

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

filled in and sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure maximum
consolidation. Any temporary work required to contain sand under flooded condition shall
be to the contractor’s account. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to
required level or slope.

3. 9.2. Construction of floors or other structures on sand fill shall not be started until the Client /
PMC has instructed and approved the fill.

3.10. FILL DENSITY:

3.10.1. The compaction only where so called for in the schedule of quantities/ items shall comply
with the specified (proctor/ modified proctor) density at moisture content differing not
more than 4percent from the optimum moisture content. Contractor shall demonstrate
adequately by field and laboratory tests that the specified density has been obtained.

3.11. LEAD:

3.11.1. Lead for deposition/ disposal of excavated material shall be as specified in the respective
item of work. For the purpose of measurement of lead the area to be excavated or filled or
area on which excavated material is to be deposited/ disposed off shall be divided into
suitable blocks and each of the blocks the distance between the centre lines shall be taken
as the lead which shall be measured by the shortest straight line route on the plan and not
the actual route taken by the contractor. No extra compensation is admissible on the
grounds that the lead including that for borrowed material had to be transported over
marshy land or Katcha land.

3.12. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

3.12.1. Excavation in all strata’s in different components of the schedule of quantities shall be
measured net and by levels. Dimensions for the purpose of payment shall be reckoned on
the horizontal area of the concrete at the base for foundations of the walls, column,
footings, tanks, rafts, or other foundations/ structures to be built multiplied by the mean
depth measured from the surface of the original ground level in accordance with drawings
or as per actual whichever is minimum.

3.12.2. In case of excavation exceeding 1.0 metre depth then 3V:1H in side slopes or as specified in
the drawing shall be paid to the contractor. The contractor may make such allowance in his
rates to provide for excavation in side slopes keeping in mind the nature of the soil and
safety of excavation. Safety of the excavation work shall be the responsibility of the
contractor.

3.12.3. No extra payment shall be paid to the contractor for providing approach ramps to facilitate
carrying out the excavation work and transporting the excavated earth at the various levels.

3.12.4. Reasonable working space not exceeding 600mm beyond the line of PCC or actual
excavation carried out whichever is less for waterproofing of basement structure wherever
considered necessary in the opinion of the Client / PMC will be allowed in excavation and
considered for payment. However, if concentrating is proposed against the sides of
excavation to place the water proofing treatment earlier to casting of foundation member

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 24

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

over break in rock up to 225mm beyond the theoretical fine of water proofing treatment
only will be permitted and paid for.

3.12.5. Over break in hard rock at bottom to the extent of 225mm in depth or actual whichever is
less will be measured and paid for. If, however, the excavation in hard rock at bottom is
done more than the required limits the same will have to be made good by filling with
concrete of mix 1:3:6 at the contractor’s cost. For the rock excavation beyond the required
profile over break in rock only will be limited to 225mm beyond the theoretical line or actual
whichever is less.

3.12.6. In case of rock strata intermixed with soil the excavated rock will be properly stacked as
directed by the Client / PMC and the volume of rock calculated on the basis of stack
measurement after deducting voids @ 50% of the volume.

3.12.7. Unless otherwise specified the unit rates quoted for excavation in different types of
materials shall also account for the basic class as specified in the item of the work. Only
leads beyond the basic lead as specified will be considered as extra lead and paid for at rates
quoted in the schedule after deducting the voids as specified in the items.

3.12.8. The rates for excavation in soft and hard rock shall include carting away the excavated rock
to the required lead as indicated in the items of work and properly stacking the same as
directed by the Client / PMC.

3.12.9. The rate to the quoted in hard rock excavation shall also be inclusive of all explosive and
additional cost, if any, involved in protective measures as stipulated above in the
specifications.

3.12.10. Backfilling as per specifications in the sides of foundations, columns, footings, structures,
walls, tanks, rafts, trenches etc. with selected excavated material will not be paid for
separately. It shall be clearly understood that the rate quoted for excavation shall include
stacking of excavated material as directed and carting it back and backfilling around the
foundations as specified above. Generally the material to be backfilled may be stacked
temporarily upto basic lead of 50metres unless otherwise directed by the Client / PMC.

3.12.11. Payment for fill inside trenches, plinth or similar filling with selected excavated material will
be made only after compaction as specified /directed. Cost of all other operations shall be
deemed to have been covered in the rate quoted for excavation. Payment for this work will
be made based on the measurement of plinth/ trench dimensions filled. If no compaction is
specified/ desired, such filling will not be separately paid for. In such a event the fill shall be
leveled/ finished to the profiles as directed at no extra cost.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 25

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

3.12.12. Filling under floors with approved murrum which may have to be brought from outside
sources shall be paid for at rates quoted. The quoted rate shall include all operations such as
clearing, excavation, lead and transportation, fill, compaction etc. as specified. Actual
quantity of consolidated filling limited to the dimension considered for payment for
excavation only shall be measured and paid for in cubic metres.

3.12.13. Actual quantity of consolidated sand filling shall be measured and paid in cubic metres.

3.12.14. Lead to be measured from the nearest boundary of the building up to the respective point of
disposal by shortest route.

3.12.15. For lead items, 20% for both soil & soft rock, 30% for debris and 50% for hard rock towards
voids shall be deducted from the truck / stack measurements (hard rock) or as specified in
the item.

-------End of Section-3-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 26

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-4-ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT:

4.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

This specification covers the general requirements for pre-constructional anti -termite
treatment to the buildings to protect against attack by sub-terranean termites by suitable
chemical treatment measures.

4.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.2.1 The building shall be adequately protected against attack by subterranean termites by
suitable chemical treatment measures. The work shall be carried out by a specialist pest
control agency approved by the Client/PMC. The work to be carried out by the specialist
firm shall carry a guarantee for the satisfactory performance of the treatment for a
minimum period of 10 years. Material Safety Data Sheets shall be furnished for the material
to be used for anti termite treatment.

4.2.2 The Contractor shall submit the product details, specifications and application methods for
insecticide materials for the reference of Client/PMC.

4.2.3 The treatment shall be carried out generally in accordance with the IS:6313- Part-II code of
practice for anti-termite measures in buildings subject to the minimum requirements given
in this specification.

4.2.4 The earth filling immediately under the stone soling /pcc (under floors) bottom and side fills
of all foundations (excepting foundations) and soil along external perimetre of all buildings
shall be chemically treated against termites.

4.2.5 The Contractor shall arrange all technical and non technical labour, tools, tackle, equipment,
materials, chemicals required for complete execution of the work in accordance with the
specification as described herein and / or as directed by the Client/PMC.

4.2.6 The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in the
Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the Safety Rules as specified in the
General Conditions of the Contract for ensuring safety of men and materials.

4.3. CODES AND STANDARDS

The applicable Indian Standard and Code is given below:

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:6313 Part I Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings -
Constructional measures
2. IS:6313 Part II Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings – pre -
constructional chemical treatment measures

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 27

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

4.4. MATERIALS

The chemical to be used as insecticide for the treatment shall be Biflex Tc, TC stands for
Termiticide Concentrate for Termite Control (Bifenthrin) and the application shall be diluted
1 part of chemical Biflex Tc with 49 parts of water to get 0.05% emulsion and strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification.

4.5. APPLICATION

4.5.1 Latest IS:6313 (Part-II) shall be followed as general guidance for preparation and application
of chemicals. The chemical solution shall be prepared by mixing the chemical with the
appropriate quantity of water to obtain a chemical emulsion of the correct concentration as
stipulated in IS: 6313 (Part - II).

The application shall be as follows:

Dilute 1 part of chemical Biflex-Tc with 49 parts of water to get 0.05% emulsion. The
prepared emulsion shall be applied by trained operators strictly in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s Specifications / directions. Health and safety precautions recommended by
manufacturer shall be observed during the treatment. The Contractor shall protect surfaces
not intended to have treatment.

To facilitate proper penetration of the chemical into the soil, a pressure pump of adequate
capacity and sprayers shall be employed to apply the solution.

4.5.2 Foundations and basement

The treatment is applied essentially to masonry foundations in trenches/ Raft foundation/

Foundation in basements where there are voids in the joints through which termites may
move above to seek entry into buildings. Hence the masonry foundations in trenches / Raft
foundation/ Foundation in basements and the areas as specified in the bills of materials are
required to be completely enveloped by a chemical barrier.

The treatment shall start at a depth of 500mm below the ground level in the case of
masonry foundation and the treatment shall start at a depth of 500mm below the horizontal
excavated surface at the raft slab level in case of foundation in basements except when such
ground level is raised or lowered by filling or cutting after the foundations have been cast. In
such cases, the depth of 500mm shall be determined from the new soil level resulting from
the filling or cutting mentioned above and in soil in immediate contact with the Horizontal /
vertical surfaces of foundations shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 liters per sq.metre.

4.5.3 Top Surface of Plinth Filling

The top surface of the consolidated earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical
emulsion at the rate of 5 liters per sqmt of the surface before the stone bed or sand bed is
laid. If the filled earth has been well consolidated and the surface does not permit the
emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centres both ways may

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 28

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

be made with 12mm dia. mild steel rod on the surfaces to facilitate saturation of the soil
with the chemical emulsion.

4.5.4 External Perimetre of Building

After the building is complete, the earth along the external perimetre of the building should
be rodded at intervals of 150mm and to a depth of 300mm. The rods should be moved
backward and forward parallel to the wall to break up the earth and chemical emulsion
poured along the wall at the rate of 7.5liters per square metre of vertical surfaces. After the
treatment, the earth should be tamped back into place. Should the earth outside the
building be graded on completion of building, this treatment should be carried out on
completion of such grading.

4.5.5 Soil Surrounding Pipes

Wherever any service pipes enter the soil inside the area of the foundation of any building,
the soil surrounding the point of entry of each pipe at the foundation, floor etc. shall be fully
soaked with the chemical solution for a distance of atleast one metre from the point of such
entry.

4.5.6 Expansion Joints

Soil beneath expansion joints at ground floor level shall be specially treated as directed. The
joint itself shall also be treated as directed by the Client/PMC.

4.5.7 Treatment under Apron

The soil below the concrete for stone aprons to be provided around the perimetre walls of
all buildings shall also be treated with the chemical solution.

4.5.8 Treatment over DPC

Top of concrete damp proof course in external and internal walls shall be given a liberal coat
of chemical solution when the concrete is still green.

4.6. PRECAUTIONS DURING TREATMENT:

4.6.1. Utmost care shall be taken to see that the chemical barrier is complete and continuous.

Each part of the area shall receive the prescribed dosage of chemical emulsion.

4.6.2. The treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet with rain
or sub-soil water.

4.6.3. Once formed, the treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed. If by chance, treated soil
barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and
completeness of the barrier system.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 29

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

4.7. PRECAUTIONS FOR HEALTH HAZARDS AND SAFETY MEASURES:

4.7.1. All the chemicals mentioned above are poisonous and hazardous to health. These chemicals
can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as vapors
or spray mist or swallowed. Persons handling or using these chemicals should be warned of
these dangers and advised that absorption through the skin is the most likely source of
accidental poisoning. They should be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions
given below particularly when handling these chemicals in the form of concentrates.

4.7.2. These chemicals are usually brought to the site in the form of emulsifiable concentrates. The
containers should be clearly labeled and should be stored carefully so that children and pets
cannot get at them. They should be kept securely closed.

4.7.3. Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates. Prolonged
exposure to dilute emulsions should also be avoided. Workers should wear clean clothing
and should wash thoroughly with soap and water especially before eating and smoking. In
the event of severe contamination, clothing should be removed at once and the skin washed
with soap and water. If chemicals splash into the eyes, they shall be flushed with plenty of
soap and water and immediate medical attention should be sought.

4.7.4. The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum
solvents. Flames should not be allowed during mixing.

4.7.5. Care should be taken in the application of soil toxicants to see that they are not allowed to
contaminate wells or springs, which serve as sources of drinking water.

4.8. The contractor has to furnish the guarantee for 10 (ten) years from the date of completion
of work stating that in case of re-appearance of termites within the building area due to
defective materials or workmanship or due to any other reasons, the contractor will carry
out the necessary post constructional treatment to keep the entire area free from termite
once again, without any extra cost to the Client during the guarantee period.

4.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT

The measurement shall be in Square metre for the plinth area of the building /area of raft
slab in the case basement floor treated.

-------End of Section-4-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 30

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-5-PCC, RCC AND RMC WORKS

5.1. GENERAL:

5.1.1. The quality of materials, method, control of Manufacture and transportation of all concrete
work in respect of mix whether reinforced or otherwise shall confirm to the applicable
portion of these specification.

5.1.2. The Client/PMC shall have the right to inspect the source of materials, the layout and
operation of procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing
equipments and the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged by the
contractor and the Client/PMC’s approval shall be obtained prior to starting of concrete
work.

5.2. SCOPE:

5.2.1. This specification covers the general requirements for concrete to be used on jobs using
on-site production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, quantity,
handling, storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing, and testing of concrete
and also requirements in regard to the quality, storage, cutting, bending and fixing of
reinforcement in position. This also covers the transportation of concrete from mixer to
the place of final deposit and placing, curing, protecting, repairing and finishing of
concrete.

5.3. APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATION:

5.3.1. The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of this specification. All
standards, tentative specifications, codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest
edition including all applicable official amendments, revisions and additional publications.
In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein this
specification shall govern.

5.3.2. List of Indian Standards:

Code
Sl.No. Description
Number
1. IS:269 Specification for ordinary, rapid hardening and low heat Portland
cement.
2. IS:383 Specification for coarse & fine aggregate from natural source or
concentrate.
3. IS:455 Portland slag cement
4. IS:456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
5. IS:457 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete for dams and other
massive structures.
6. IS:515 Specification for natural and manufactured aggregate for use in mass
concrete.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 31

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

7. IS:516 Method of test for strength of concrete.

8. IS:650 Specifications for standard sand for testing of cement.
9. IS:1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.
10. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building works.
11. IS:1489 Portland-Pozzolana cement, Fly ash based, Calcined clay based.
12. IS:1566 Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
13. IS:1786 Specification for cold-worked steel high strength deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement.
14. IS:1791 Specification for batch type concrete mixers.
15. IS:2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete: Particle size and shape.
(Part-I)
16. IS:2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete-Estimation of deleterious
(Part-II) materials and organic impurities.
17. IS:2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete-specific gravity, density,
(Part-III) voids, absorption and bulking.
18. IS:2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete-Mechanical properties
(Part-IV)
19. IS:2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete-Soundness.
(Part-V)
20. IS:2386 Measuring mortar making properties of fine aggregates.
(Part-VI)
21. IS:2386 Method of test for Alkali aggregates reactivity.
(Part-VII)
22. IS:2386 Petrographic examination of aggregates.
(Part-VIII)
23. Is:2430 Methods of sampling of aggregates for concrete.
24. IS:2438 Specification for roller pan mixer.
25. IS:2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
26. IS:2505 Specification for immersion type concrete vibrators
27. IS:2506 Specification for screed board concrete vibrators.
28. IS:2514 Specification for concrete vibrating table.
29. ISs:2645 Specification for integral cement water proofing compound
30. IS:2722 Specification for portable swing weigh batcher for concrete.
31. IS:3025 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water used
in industry.
32. IS:3366 Specification for pan vibrator.
33. IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:
(PART-I) General.
34. IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:
(PART-II) Reinforced concrete structure.
35. IS:3385 Code of practice for measurement of Civil Engineering works.
36. IS:3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings.
37. IS:3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for consolidating
concrete.
38. IS:3935 Code of practice for composite construction.
39. IS:4031 Method of physical test for hydraulic cement.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 32

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

40. IS:4656 Specification for form vibrator

IS:7681 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting (for hot weather
41. (PART-I) concreting).
42. IS:8112 Specifications for high strength ordinary Portland cement (Grade 43).
43. IS:10262 Code of practice for design mix
44. IS:12269 Specifications for high strength ordinary Portland cement (Grade 53).
IS:13311 Non-destructive testing of concrete: Method of test for ultrasonic
45. (PART-I) pulse velocity.
IS:13311 Non-destructive testing of concrete: Method of testing by rebound
46. (PART-II) hammer.

5.4. MATERIALS FOR STANDARD CONCRETE:

5.4.1. The ingredients to be used in the manufacture of standard concrete shall consist solely of a
standard type Portland cement; clean sand, natural coarse aggregate, clean water, ice, an
admixture, if specifically called for on drawings or schedule of quantities.

5.4.1.1. Cement:

5.4.1.1.1. Unless otherwise specified or called for by the Client/PMC cement shall be ordinary
Portland cement / Portland Pozzolana cement (Fly ash based meeting the 28day strength
requirement of OPC 43 grade cement) in 50 kg bags. The use of bulk cement will be
permitted only with the approval of the Client/PMC. Changing of brand or type of cement
within the same structure will not be permitted. In case it is required to change the brand
of cement in the same structure, prior permission shall be obtained from the Client/PMC.

5.4.1.1.2. If demanded a certified report attesting to the conformity of the cement to

I.S.specifications by the cement manufacturer’s chemist shall be furnished to the
Client/PMC.

5.4.1.1.3. The contractor will have to make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate
quantity of cement. Cement in bulk may be stored in bins or silos, which will provide
complete protection from dampness, contamination and minimize cracking and false set.
Cement bags shall be stored in dry enclosed shed (storage under tarpaulins will not be
permitted), well away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid contact
with moisture from ground and so arranged as to provide ready access. Damaged or
reclaimed or partly set cement will not be permitted to use and shall be removed from
site. The storage bins and storage arrangements shall be such that there is no dead
storage. Not more than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage arrangement shall
be approved by the Client/PMC. Consignment of cement shall be stored as received and
shall be consumed in the order of their delivery.

5.4.1.1.4. Cement held storage for a period of Ninety (90)days or longer shall be tested before use in
work. Should at any time the Client/PMC have reason to consider that any cement is
defective, then irrespective of its origin and / or manufacturer’s test certificate, such a
cement shall be tested immediately at a National Test Laboratory / any approved

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 33

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Laboratory or such approved laboratory and until the result of such test are found
satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.

5.4.1.2. Aggregates:

5.4.1.2.1. Aggregate in general designates both fine and coarse inert materials used in the
manufacture of concrete. Fine Aggregate is aggregate most of which passes through
4.75mm I.S.sieve. Coarse Aggregate is aggregate most of which retained on 4.75mm
I.S.sieve.

5. 4.1.2.2. All fine and coarse aggregate proposed for use in the work shall be subjected to Client/PMC’s
approval and after specific materials have been accepted the source of supply of such
materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Client/PMC.

5.4.1.2.3. Aggregates shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone and gravel from source known to
produce satisfactory aggregate for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard,
durable against weathering, of limited porosity and free from deleterious materials that may
cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength and/ or durability of
concrete. The grading of aggregate shall be such as to produce a dense concrete of specified
strength and consistency that will work readily into position without segregation and shall
be based on the “mixed design” and preliminary test on concrete specified herein after.

5.4.1.3. Sampling and Testing:

5.4.1.3.1. Samples of the aggregates for mixed design and determination of suitability shall be taken
under the supervision of the Client/PMC and delivered to the laboratory, well in advance of
the scheduled placing of concrete. Records of tests, which have been made on proposed
aggregates and on concrete made from this source of aggregates, shall be furnished to the
Client/PMC in advance of the work for use in determining the aggregate suitability.

5.4.1.4. Storage of Aggregates:

5. 4.1.4.1. All coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately in stock piles in the material yard
near the work site in bins properly constructed to avoid inter mixing of different aggregates.
Contamination with the foreign materials and earth during storage and while heaping the
materials shall be avoided. The aggregate must be specified quality not only at the time of
receiving at site but more so at the time of loading into mixer. Rakers shall be used for lifting
the coarse aggregates from the bins or stock piles. Coarse aggregate shall be piled in layers
not exceeding 1.20metres in height to prevent coning or segregation. Each layer shall cover
the entire area of the stock pile before succeeding layers are started. Aggregates that have
become segregated shall be rejected. Rejected material after re-mixing may be accepted, if
subsequent tests demonstrate conformity with required gradation.

5.4.1.5. Specific Gravity:

5.4.1.5.1. Aggregate having a specific gravity below 2.60 (saturated surface dry basis) shall not be used
without special permission of the Client/PMC.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 34

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5. 4.1.6. Fine Aggregate:

5.4.1.6.1. Fine aggregate except as noted above and for other than lightweight concrete shall consist
of natural river sand (suitable for concrete,) crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand
stone dust confirming to I.S.383. The sand shall be clean, sharp, hard, durable, chemically
inert and free from dust, vegetable substances, adherent coating, clay, organic matter,
alkalis, mica, salt or other deleterious substances which can be injurious to the setting
qualities/ strength/ durability of concrete. No creek / sea sand shall be allowed.

5.4.1.6.2. Machine made sand will be acceptable provided the constituent rock/ gravel composition is
sound, hard, dense, non-organic, uncoated and durable against weathering.

5.4.1.6.3. Sand shall be prepared for use by such screening or washing or both as necessary to remove
all objectionable foreign matter while separating the sand grains to the required size
fractions. Sand with silt content more than 3 % will not be permitted for use unless the same
is washed and silt content is brought within 3% by weight.

5.4.1.6.4. The percentage of deleterious substances in sand delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the
following:

Sl.No. Substances % by weight

Uncrushed:Crushed
1. Material finer than 75micron I.S.sieve 3.00% : 15%
2. Shale 1.00% : ----
3. Coal and lignite 1.00% : 1.00%
4. Clay lumps 1.00% : 1.00%
Total of all above substances including items 1to4 for 5.00% : 2.00%
uncrushed sand & items 3&4 for crushed sand.

5.4.1.6.5. Unless otherwise directed or approved, the grading of sand shall be within the limits
indicated hereunder:

Percentage passing for

Sl.No. IS Sieve designation
Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III Zone-IV
1. 10mm 100 100 100 100
2. 4.75mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
3. 2.36mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
4. 1.18mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
5. 600micron 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
6. 300micron 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
7. 150micron 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 35

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.4.1.6.6. Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves, other than
600 micron I.S.sieve by total amount not exceeding 5% (five percent), it shall be regarded as
falling within the grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied to percentage passing the
600-micron I.S.sieve or to percentage passing any other sieve size on the coarser limit of
Grading Zone -I or the finer limit of Grading Zone-IV. Fine aggregates confirming to Grading
Zone -IV shall not be used unless mix designs and preliminary tests have shown its suitability
for producing concrete of specified strength and workability.

5.4.1.6.7. The sand shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.2 or more than 3.2. The fineness
modulus is determined by adding the cumulative percentage retained on the I.S.sieve
(4.75mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 600micron, 300micron and 150micron) and dividing the sum by
100.

5.4.1.7. Coarse Aggregate:

5.4.1.7.1. Coarse aggregate for concrete except as noted above and for other than lightweight
concrete shall confirm to I.S.383. This shall consist of natural or crushed stone and gravel,
and shall be free from elongated, flaky or laminated pieces, adhering coatings, clay lumps,
coal residue, clinkers, slag, alkalis, mica, organic matter or other deleterious matter.

5.4.1.7.2. The coarse aggregate and fine aggregate shall be tested from time to time as required by the
Client/PMC to ascertain its suitability or use in construction and the charges for testing
aggregate shall be borne by the contractor as specified herein after

5.4.1.7.3. Crushed rock shall be screened and/or washed for the removal of dirt or dust coating if so
demanded by the Client/PMC.

5.4.1.7.4. Coarse aggregates shall be either in single size or graded. In both cases grading shall be
within the following limits:

a. Table: 1

Sl.No IS Sieve Percentage passing for single sized aggregate of nominal size
. designation 63mm 40mm 20mm 16mm 12.5mm 10mm
1. 80mm 100 - - - - -
2. 63mm 85-100 100 - - - -
3. 40mm 0-30 85-100 100 - - -
4. 20mm 0-5 0-20 85-100 100 - -
5. 16mm - - - 85-100 100 -
6. 12.5mm - - - - 85-100 100
7. 10mm 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85-100
8. 4.75mm - - 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-20
9. 2.36mm - - - - - 0-5

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 36

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

b. Table: 2

Sl.No IS Sieve Percentage passing of graded aggregate of nominal size

. designation 40mm 20mm 16mm 12.5mm
1. 50mm 0 - - -
2. 63mm 100 - - -
3. 40mm 95-100 100 - -
4. 20mm 30-70 95-100 100 100
5. 16mm - - 90-100 -
6. 12.5mm - - - 90-100
7. 10mm 10-35 25-55 3-700 40-85
8. 4.75mm 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
9. 2.36mm - - - -

5.4.1.7.5 The pieces shall be angular in shape and shall have granular or crystalline surfaces. Friable,
flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale if present shall be only in such quantities that will
not in the opinion of Client/PMC affect adversely the strength and / or durability of concrete.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be the maximum size specified above but in no
case greater than ¼ of the minimum thickness of the member provided that the concrete
can be placed without difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the
corners of form. Plums above 160mm and up to any reasonable size can be used in plain
mass concrete work of large dimensions up to a maximum limit of 20% by volume of
concrete when specially approved by the Client/PMC. For heavily reinforced concrete
members the nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall be 5mm less than the minimum
clear distance between the main reinforcing bars or 5mm less than the minimum cover to
the reinforcement whichever is smaller. The amount of fine particles occurring in the free
state or as loose adherent shall not exceed 1% when determined by laboratory
sedimentation tests as per I.S.2386. After 24 hours immersion in water, a previously dried
sample shall not have gained more than 10% of its oven dry weight in air as determined by
I.S.2386.

5.4.1.7.6 The percentage of deleterious substances in the coarse aggregate delivered to the mixer
shall not exceed the following:

Sl.No. Substances % by weight of aggregates

Uncrushed:Crushed
1. Material finer than 75micron ISsieve 3.00 : 3.00
2. Coal and lignite 1.00 : 1.00
3. Clay lumps 1.00 :-1.00
4. Sift fragments 3.00 : ----
Total of all above substances 5.00 :5.00

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 37

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.4.1.8. Water:

5.4.1.8.1. Water used for both mixing and curing shall be free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel. Potable water is generally satisfactory for mixing and curing of concrete.
In case of doubt the suitability of water for making concrete shall be ascertained by the
compressive strength and initial setting time test specified in I.S.456. The sample of water
taken for testing shall be typical for the water proposed to be used for concrete, due
account being paid to seasonal variation. The sample shall not receive any treatment before
testing other than that envisaged in the regular supply of water proposed for use in
concrete. The sample shall be stored in a clean container previously rinsed out with similar
water.

5.4.1.8.2. Average 28days compressive strength of at least three 150mm size concrete cubes prepared
with water to be used shall not be less than 90% of the average strength of three similar
concrete cubes prepared with distilled water. The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested
in accordance with the requirements of IS: 516.

5.4.1.8.3. The initial setting time of test block made with the appropriate test cement and the water
proposed to be used shall not be less than 30 minutes and shall not differ by more than + 30
minutes from the initial setting time of control test block prepared with the appropriate test
cement and distilled water. The block shall be prepared and tested in accordance with the
requirements of IS: 4031 (Part 5).

5.4.1.8.4. Where water can be shown to contain an excess of acid, alkali, sugar or salt, Client/PMC may
refuse to permit its use. As a guide the following concentration represent the maximum
permissible values:

5.4.1.8.4.1. To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using Phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
require more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH. The details of test shall be as given in 8.1 of IS:
3025 (Part 22).

5.4.1.8.4.2. To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using Methyl Orange as an indicator, it should not
require more than 25 ml of 0.02 normal H2SO4. The details of test shall be as given in 8 of
IS: 3025 (Part 23).

5.4.1.8.5. The percentage of solids, when tested in accordance with the IS: 3025 shall not exceed the
following:

Sl.No. Substances tested as per Permissible %

1. Organic IS:3025 (part18) 0.02% (200mg/ltr)
2. Inorganic IS:3025 (part18) 0.30%(3000mg/ltr)
3. Sulphates (as SO3) IS:3025 (part24) 0.04%(400mg/ltr)
4. Chlorides (as Cl) IS:3025 (part32 0.20%(2000mg/ltr) for concrete not
containing embedded steel and 0.05%
(500mg/ltr) for reinforced concrete
works.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 38

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5. Suspended matter IS:3025 (part17) 0.20%(2000mg/ltr)

5.4.1.8.6. P.H. value of water shall generally be not less than 6.

5.5. DESIGN MIX CONCRETE:

5.5.1. All reinforced concrete in the work shall be “Design Mix Concrete” as defined in IS: 456
considering as ‘severe’ environment and cost of design mix shall be included in the item rate
and no separate payment shall be made on account of this. All “Design Mix Concrete” work
to be carried out under these specifications shall be in grades designated as per table below.

Use of mineral admixtures like fly ash, GGBFS, etc. shall not be permitted in the design mix
unless otherwise special permission is given by the Client/PMC. Cement shall be Ordinary
Portland Cement – 43grade or Portland Pozzolana Cement (Fly ash based meeting the 28day
strength requirement of OPC 43 grade cement) only.

Group Grade Specified Characteristic Compressive Strength of 150mm

designation Cube at 28days in N/mm2
Ordinary M-10 10
Concrete M-15 15
M-20 20
Standard M-25 25
Concrete M-30 30
M-35 35
M-40 40
M-45 45
M-50 50

Note:

1). The Characteristic strength is defined as the strength of material below which not
more than 5% of the test results are expected to fall.

2). In the designation of a concrete mix, letter ‘M’ refers to the mix and the number to the
specified characteristic compressive strength of 150mm size cube at 28days in N/mm2.

3). The mix shall be designed to produce the grade of concrete having the required
workability and characteristic strength not less than appropriate value given in the
table above.

5.5.2. Mix Design:

5.5.2.1. This is to investigate the grading of aggregates, water cement ratio, workability and the
quantity of cement required to give works cubes of the characteristic strength specified.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 39

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The proportions of the mix shall be determined by weight. Adjustment of aggregate

proportions due to moisture present in the aggregate shall be made. Mix proportioning
shall be carried out according to the ACI standard designation ‘ACI-613’ or Design of
concrete mixes - Road Research Note No.4, Department of Scientific and Industrial
Research U.K. or I.S.10262.

5.5.2.2. Since different cements and aggregates of different maximum size, grading, surface
texture, shape and other characteristics may produce concretes of different compressive
strength for the same free water cement ratio, the relationship between strength and free
water cement ratio should preferably be established for the materials actually to be used.
In the absence of such data, the preliminary free water cement ratio (by mass)
corresponding to the target strength at 28days may be selected from the relationship
shown in Fig.1 of I.S.10262 at page 7.

5.5.2.3. Alternately, the preliminary free water cement ratio (by mass) corresponding to the target
average strength may be selected from the relationship in Fig. 2 of I.S.10262 page at 8,
using the curve corresponding to the 28days cement strength to be used for the purpose.
Other relevant items to the used with design of mix should strictly confirm to the relevant
clauses and appendices of I.S.10262. The calculated mix proportions shall be checked by
means of trial batches. The contractor should refer to the item No.4 at page 12 and the
Appendix ‘D’ (clause No. 4.1) of I.S.10262 for neat illustration. The contractor may refer
Appendix ‘C’ (clause 3.8) at page 16 of I.S.10262 for an example illustrating the mix design
of M-20. The free water cement ratio selected as above should be checked against the
limiting water cement ratio for the requirement of durability and the lower of the two
values should be adopted.

5.5.2.4. Whenever there is a change either in required strength of concrete or water cement ratio
or workability or the source of aggregates and/ or cement fresh tests shall be carried out to
determine the revised proportion of the mix to suit the altered conditions. While designing
mix proportions over wet mixes shall always be avoided.

5.5.2.5. While fixing the value for water cement ratio for ‘Design Mix’ assistance may be derived
from the standard graph showing the relationship between the 28days compressive
strength of concrete mixes with different water cement ratios and the 7days compressive
strength of cement tested in accordance with I.S.269 and I.S.8112.

5.5.2.6. It will be contractor’s sole responsibility to establish the concrete mix designs for different
grades of concrete specified in the work consistent with the workability required for nature
of work an also taking into consideration the assumed standard deviation which will be
expected at site or by establishing the standard deviation based on 30 test results at site
for each grade of concrete so as to produce concrete of required strength, durability and
surface finish. The materials and proportions used in making the tests to be carried out
either at site or under laboratory, conditions shall be similar in all respects to those to be
actually employed in the works as the object of these tests is to determine the proportions
of cement, aggregates and water necessary to produce the concrete of the required
consistency to give such specified strength.

5.5.3. Standard Deviation:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 40

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.5.3.1. Standard deviation of concrete of each grade shall be determined separately. When results
of sufficient number of tests (at least 30) are not available, then the value of standard
deviation given in the table below may be assumed for design mix in the first instance. As
soon as the results of the samples are available, actual calculated standard deviation shall
be used and the mix designed properly.

5.5.3.2. Assumed Standard Deviation:

Sl.No. Grade of Specified Characteristic Compressive Strength of 150mm Cube

concrete at 28days in N/mm2
1. M-10 3.5
2. M-15
3. M-20 4.0
4. M-25
5. M-30 5.0
6. M-35
7. M-40
8. M-45
9. M-50

Note:

The above values correspond to the site control having proper storage of cement; weigh
batching of all materials; controlled addition of water; regular checking of all materials;
aggregate grading and moisture content; and periodical checking of workability and
strength. Where there is deviation from the above, the values given in the above table shall
be increased by 1 N/mm2.

5.5.3.3. Standard Deviation Based On Test Results:

5.5.3.3.1. The total number of test results required to constitute and acceptable record for calculation
of standard deviation shall be not less than 30. Attempts should be made to obtain the 30
test results as early as possible when a mix is used for the first time.

5.5.3.3.2. The calculation of the standard deviation shall be brought up to date after every change of
mix design and at least once in a month.

5.5.3.4. Determination of Standard Deviation:

5.5.3.4.1. Concrete of each grade shall be analyzed separately to determine its standard deviation.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 41

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.5.3.4.2. The standard deviation of concrete of given grade shall be calculated using the following
formula from the results of individual tests of concrete of that grade obtained as specified
for test strength of sample :

Estimated Standard Deviation (S) = sqrt (X2/ (n-1))

Where X = Deviation of the individual test strength from the average strength of a sample
and

n = Number of sample test results.

5.5.3.4.3. When significant changes are made in the proportion of concrete (for example changes in
materials used, mix design, equipments or technical control), the standard deviation value
shall be separately calculated for such batches of concrete.

5.5.4. Proportioning:

5.5.4.1. The proportions which shall be decided by conducting preliminary tests, shall be by weight.
These proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates shall be maintained during
subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers confirming to I.S.2722, capable
of controlling the weights within one percent of the desired value. Except where it can be
shown to the satisfaction of the Client/PMC that supply of properly graded aggregate of
uniform quality can be maintained over the period of work, the grading of aggregate shall be
controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different sizes and blending them in the
right proportions. The different sizes shall be stacked in separate stock piles. The grading of
coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked as frequently as possible, as determined by the
Client/PMC, to ensure maintaining of grading in accordance with samples used in
preliminary mix design. The material shall be stock piles well in advance of use.

5.5.4.2. The cement shall be measured by weight for design mix. Every facility should be provided to
the Client/PMC for sampling and inspection of stored cement at site of work.

5.5.4.3. Only such quantity of water shall be added to the cement and aggregate in the concrete mix
as to ensure dense concrete, specified surface finish, satisfactory workability, consistent
with strength stipulated for each class of concrete. The water added to the mix shall be such
as not to cause segregation of materials or the collection of excessive free water on the
surface of the concrete.

5.5.4.4. The water cement ratio (W/C) is defined as the weight of water in mix (including the surface
moisture of the aggregate) divided by the weight of cement in the mix. The actual water
cement ratio to be adopted shall be determined in each instance by the contractor and
approved by the Client/PMC.

5.5.4.5. The water cement ratio specified for use by the Client/PMC shall be maintained. The
contractor shall determine the water content of the aggregate as frequently as directed by
the Client/PMC as the work progresses and as specified in I.S.2386 (Part-III) and the amount
of mixing water added at the mixer shall be adjusted as directed by the Client/PMC so as to

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 42

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

maintain the specified water cement ratio. To allow for the variation in their moisture
content, suitable adjustments in the weights of aggregates shall also be made.

5.5.5. Consistency and Slump:

5.5.5.1. Concrete shall be of a consistency and workability suitable for the conditions of the job.
After the amount of water required is determined the consistency of mix shall be
maintained throughout the progress of the corresponding parts of the work and approved
tests e.g. slump tests, compacting factor test etc. in accordance with I.S.1199, shall be
conducted from time to time to ensure the maintenance of such consistency.

5.5.5.2. The following tabulation gives a range of workability which shall generally be used for
various types of construction unless otherwise instructed by the Client/PMC:

5.5.5.2.1. Workability of Concrete:

Placing Conditions Degree of workability Value of Workability

Placing conditions Degree of Value of workability

workability
Blinding concrete’ shallow sections, Very low 0.75 - 0.80 compacting factor
pavements using pavers
Mass concrete; lightly reinforced Medium Slump of
sections in slabs, beams, walls, columns, 25-75mm
floors, hand placed pavements, canal
lining; strip footings
Trench fill; In-situ piling High Slump of
Tremie concrete Very high 100-150mm

5.5.6. Batching and Mixing of Concrete:

5.5.6.1. The material and proportions of concrete ingredients as established by the preliminary tests
for the mix design shall be rigidly followed for all concrete works on the project and shall not
be changed except when specifically permitted by Client/PMC.

5.5.6.2. Concrete shall be produced only by weigh batching the ingredients. The mixer and weigh
batcher shall be maintained in clean serviceable condition. The accuracy of weigh batcher
shall be periodically checked. They shall be set up in level on a firm base and the hopper
shall be loaded evenly. The needle shall be adjusted to zero when the hopper is empty. Fine
and coarse aggregates shall be weighed separately unless otherwise stated.

5.5.6.3. Volume batching will not be permitted. However Client/PMC may permit volume batching
by subsequent conversion of weights of ingredients into their equivalent volumes in respect
of their bulk densities only in the case of small and less important pours involving concrete

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 43

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

of not more than 0.25 cubic metre on theday when other pours involving weigh batching are
not likely to be taken up.

5.5.6.4. The concrete shall be of strength as stipulated in the respective items. All concrete shall be
mixed in mechanically operated batch mixers complying with I.S.1791 and of approved
make with suitable provision for correctly controlling the water delivered to the drum.

5.5.6.5. The quantity of water actually entering the drum shall be checked with the reading of the
gauge or valve setting when starting a job. The test should be made while the mixer is
running.

5.5.6.6. The volume of the mixed material shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rated mixer capacity.
The batch shall be charged into the mixer so that some water will enter the drum in advance
of cement and aggregate. All water shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of
the specified mixing time. Each batch shall be mixed until the concrete is uniform in colour
for a minimum period of two minutes after all ingredients are in the drum.

5.5.6.7. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged in one operation before the raw
materials for the succeeding batches are fed into the drum.

5.5.6.8. Each time the work stops the mixer shall be cleaned out and when next commencing the
mixing the first batch shall have 10% addition cement to allow for sticking in the drum.

5.6. SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONCRETE:

5.6.1. If the Client/PMC desires facilities required for sampling materials and concrete in the field
shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost. The following equipments (in
serviceable condition) with operator shall be made available at request of the Client/PMC:

Sl.No. Equipments Requirement

1. Cast Iron cube moulds of 150mm size As required
2. Slump cone complete set with tamping rod 1set

3. Laboratory balance to weight up to 5 kg. 1no

With sensitivity of 10 gm.
4. Laboratory balance of 2 kg. Capacity and
sensitivity of 1 gm. 1no
5. I.S.sieves for coarse and fine aggregates 1set
6. A set of measure from 0.1 litre to 5 litres. 1set
7. Electric oven with thermostat up to 120
degree centigrade 1no
8. Flakiness gauge 1no
9. Elongation index gauge 1no
10. Sedimentation pipette 1no
11. Pyconometre 1no
12 Calibrated glass jar of 1 litre capacity 2nos
13. Glass flasks and metal containers As required
14. Chemical reagents like Sodium Hydroxide, As required

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 44

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Tannic Acid, Litmus papers etc.

5.6.2. The concrete test cubes will be tested at any approved or site laboratory. The contractor
shall make all arrangements to cure, store of concrete cubes and transport the same to the
laboratory at his own cost as directed by the Client/PMC.

5.6.3. Sampling and Strength Test of Concrete:

5.6.3.1. The samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per I.S.1199 and cubes shall be made,
cured and tested at 28days in accordance with I.S.516.

5.6.3.2. In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete optional test on beams for
modulus of rupture at 72 (+/ -)2 hrs. or at 7days or compressive strength tests at 7days may
be carried out in addition to 28days compressive strength tests. For this purpose the value
given in table below may be taken for general guidance in case of concrete made with
ordinary Portland cement. In all cases, the 28days compressive strength specified shall
alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete. If however, from test
carried out in particular job over a reasonably long period, it has been established to the
satisfaction of the Client/PMC that a suitable ratio between 28days compressive strength
and the modulus of rupture at 72(+/ -)2 hrs. or 7days or compressive strength at 7days may
be accepted. The Client/PMC may suitable relax the frequency of 28days compressive
strength, provided the expected strength values at the specified early age are consistently
met.

5.6.3.3. Frequency of Sampling:

5.6.3.3.1. A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch shall
have a reasonable chance of being tested, i.e. the sampling should be spread over the
entire period of concreting and cover all mixing units.

5.6.3.3.2. The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in accordance with
the following:

Sl.No. Quantity of concrete Number of samples

1. 1.00 to 5.00 m3 One
2. 6.00 to 15.00 m3 Two
3. 16.00 to 30.00 m3 Three
4. 31.00 to 50.00 m3 Four
5. 51.00 m3 and above Four plus one additional sample for each additional
50m3 part thereof.

At least one sample shall be taken from each shift. Where concrete is produced at
continuous production unit, such as ready -mixed concrete plant, frequency of sampling
may be agreed upon mutually by suppliers and purchasers.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 45

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.6.3.3.3. Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28days. Additional
cubes may be required for various purposes such as to determine the strength of concrete
at 7days or at the time of striking the formwork or to determine the duration of curing or
to check the testing error. Additional cubes may also be required for testing cubes cured by
accelerated methods as described in I.S.9013. The specimen shall be tested as described in
I.S.516.

5.6.3.4. The test strength of the samples shall be the average of the strength of three specimens.
The individual variation should not be more than (+/-) 15 percent of the average.

5.6.3.5. Slump test shall be carried out as often as demanded by the Client/PMC and invariably
from the same batch of concrete from which the test cubes are made. Slump test shall be
done immediately after sampling.

5.6.3.6. Standard Deviation shall be vide clause ‘5.3’ of this specification.

5.7. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

5.7.1. The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirement if:

5.7.1.1. The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results complies
with the appropriate limits in the below table.

Specified Mean of the Group of 4Non-overlapping consecutive Individual Test

Grade Test results in N/mm2 results in N/mm2
M 15 > fck + 0.825 x established standard deviation
(rounded off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2) > f ck - 3 N/mm2
Or fck + 3 N/mm2 whichever is greater
M 20 or > fck + 0.825 x established standard deviation
above (rounded off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2)
> f ck - 4 N/mm2
or
fck + 4 N/mm2 whichever is greater

5.7.1.2. Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in col.3 of table below.

Specified Grade Mean of the Group of 4 Non-overlapping consecutive test results in N/mm2
Individual Test Results in N/mm2.

5.7.2. If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant to 7.0 above, the structural adequacy of
the part affected shall be investigated and any consequential action as needed shall be
taken.

5.7.3. Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately. Concrete shall be assessed daily for
compliance.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 46

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.7.4. Concrete of each grade shall be liable to be rejected if it is porous or honey -combed, its
placing has been interrupted without providing a proper construction joints, the
reinforcement has been displaced beyond the tolerances specified or construction
tolerances have not been met. However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after
carrying out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Client/PMC.

5.8. ADMIXTURES:

5.8.1. Admixture may be used in concrete only with the approval of the Client/PMC based upon
evidence that with the passage of time neither the compressive strength nor its durability
reduced. Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any
concrete containing reinforcement or embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is
permitted to be used such as in mass concrete works it shall be dissolved in water and
added to the mixing water in an amount not exceed 1.5 percent of the weight of the cement
in each batch of concrete. When admixtures are used the designed concrete mix shall be
corrected accordingly. Admixtures shall be used as per manufacturer’s instructions and in
the manner and with the control specified by Client/PMC. The cost of admixtures shall be
included in the item rate and no extra amount shall be paid on this account.

5.8.2. Where specified and approved by Client/PMC neutralized vinsol resin or/ and other
approved air entraining agent may be used to procedure the specified amount of air in the
concrete mix and these agents shall conform to the requirements of ASTM standard 6-260
air entraining admixture of concrete. The recommended total air content in the concrete is
4% + 1%. The method of measuring air content shall be as per I.S.1199.

5.8.3. Retarding Admixtures:

5.8.3.1. Where specified and approved by the Client/PMC retarding agents shall be added to the
concrete mix in quantities specified by Client/PMC.

5.8.4. Water Reducing Admixtures:

5.8.4.1. Where specified and approved by Client/PMC water reducing lignosulfonate mixture shall be
added in quantities specified by Client/PMC. The admixtures shall be added in the form of a
solution.

5.8.5. Water Proofing Agent:

Where specified and approved by Client/PMC chloride and sulphide free waterproofing
agent shall be added in the quantities specified by Client/PMC.

5.8.6. Other Admixtures:

Client/PMC may at his discretion instruct contractor to use any other admixture in the
concrete.

5.9. OPTIONAL TESTS:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 47

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.9.1. If the Client/PMC desires he may order tests to be carried out on cement, sand, course
aggregate, water etc. in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards. Tests on cement
shall include : (i)Fineness test, (ii)Test for normal consistency, (iii)Test for setting time,
(iv)Test for soundness, (v)Test for compressive strength, (vi)Test of heat of hydration (by
experiment and by calculation) in accordance with I.S.269.

5.9.2. Tests on sand shall include : (i)Sieve test, (ii)Test for organic impurities, (iii)Decantation test
for determining clay and silt content, (iv)Specific gravity test, (v)Test for unit weight and
bulkage factor, (vi)Test for sieve analysis and fineness modulus.

5.9.3. Tests on coarse aggregate shall include:

(i) Sieve analysis

(ii) Specific gravity and unit weight of dry, loose and rodded aggregate

(iii) Soundness and alkali aggregate reactivity

(iv) Petrographic examination

(v) Test for deleterious materials and organic impurities

(vi) Test for aggregate crushing value.

5.9.4. Tests on aggregate would normally be ordered to be carried out only if Client/PMC feels the
materials are not in accordance with the specifications or if the specified concrete strengths
are not obtained and shall be performed by the contractor at an approved test laboratory.

5.10. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES:

5.10.1. Immediately after stripping the form work all concrete shall be carefully inspected and any
defective work or small defects either removed or made good before the concrete has
thoroughly hardened as instructed by the Client/PMC.

5.10.2. In case of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used either due to poor workmanship or
based on results of cube strength tests the contractor may be asked to carry out
compressive strength test of concrete on the basis of core test, ultrasonic test and/ or load
test.

5.10.3. In case of results of cube strength are observed to be lower than the required designed
strength at 28days as per specifications, ultrasonic test shall be carried out by the digital
ultrasonic concrete tester by an approved agency at the cost of the contractor.

5.10.4. In case the ultrasonic test do not satisfy the requirement as above the Client will be at
liberty to reject the concrete and the contractor has to dismantle and redo the same or
carry out such remedial measures as approved by the Client at the contractor’s own cost.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 48

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.10.5. The unit rate for concrete shall be all inclusive of making preliminary mix design and test
cubes, works cubes, testing them as per specifications, slump test, optional tests etc.
However, the Client will test the same in any approved laboratory the contractor will have
to make arrangement for transportation of the cubes to the approved laboratory.

5.10.6. In case cube tests give unsatisfactory results the contractor should also conduct conclusive
tests such as ultrasonic pulse test, core test etc. to prove the suitability of concrete. The cost
of the conclusive tests shall have to be borne by the contractor.

5.10.7. If the results of ay test prove unsatisfactory or the structure shows signs of weakness, undue
deflection or faulty construction the contractor shall remove and rebuild the member(s)
involved or carry out such other remedial measures as may be required by the Client/PMC.
The contractor shall bear the cost of so doing unless the failure of the member(s) to fulfill
the test conditions is approved to be solely due to faulty design. The cost of all tests shall be
borne by the contractor.

5.11. OPREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FINAL INSPECTION AND APPROVAL:

5.11.1. Before the concrete is actually placed in position the insides of formwork shall be inspected
to see that they have been cleaned and oiled. Temporary openings shall be provided to
facilitate inspection especially at bottom of columns and wall forms to permit removal of
saw dust, wood shavings, binding wire, rubbish, dirt etc. Such openings/ holes shall be later
suitably plugged.

5.11.2. The various traders shall be permitted ample time to install drainage and plumbing lines,
floor and trench drain, conduits, hangers, anchors, inserts, sleeves, bolts frames and other
miscellaneous embedment to be cast in the concrete as indicated on the drawing or as
necessary for the proper execution of the work. All such embedment shall be correctly
positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent displacement during depositing and
vibrating of concrete.

5.11.3. Slots, openings, holes, pockets etc. shall be provided in concrete work in the positions
indicated in the drawings or as directed by the Client/PMC.

5.11.4. Reinforcement and other items to be cast in concrete shall have clean surfaces that will not
impair bond.

5.11.5. Prior to concrete placement all works shall be inspected and approved by the Client/PMC
and if found unsatisfactory concrete shall not be poured until all defects have been
corrected at contractor’s cost.

5.11.6. Approval of Client/PMC for any and all materials and work as required herein shall not
relieve contractor from his obligations to produce finished concrete in accordance with the
drawings and specifications.

5.11.7. Rain or Wash Water:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 49

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.11.7.1. No concrete shall be placed in wet weather or on a water covered surface. Any concrete that
has been washed by heavy rains shall be entirely removed if there is any sign of cement and
sand having been washed away from the concrete mixture.

5.11.7.2. Before leaving unattended the work shall be covered with tarpaulins immediately after the
concrete has been placed and compacted to safe guard against damages, which may be
caused by rain.

5.11.7.3. Any water accumulating on the surface of the newly placed concrete shall be removed by
approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon until such water is
removed. To avoid flow of water over / around freshly placed concrete suitable drains and
sumps shall be provided.

5.11.8. Bonding Mortar:

5.11.8.1. Immediately before concrete placement begins prepared surfaces except formwork which
will come in contact with the concrete to be placed shall be covered with a bonding mortar
of the same strength of concrete.

5.11.9. Transportation:

5.11.9.1. All buckets, containers or conveyers used for transport the concrete shall be mortar tight. All
means of conveyance shall be adopted to deliver the concrete of the required consistency
and plasticity without segregation or loss of slump whatever method for transportation is
employed.

5.11.9.2. Chute shall not be used for transport of concrete without the written permission of the
Client/PMC and concrete shall not be re-handled before placing.

5.11.10. Contaminated Concrete:

5.11.10.1. Concrete must be placed in its final position before it become too stiff to work.

5.11.10.2. On no account water shall be added after the initial mixing.

5.11.10.3. Concrete which has become stiff or has been contaminated with foreign materials and which
has not been placed within half an hour of mixing water with cement shall be rejected and
disposed off as directed by the Client/PMC.

5.11.10.4. All equipments used for mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be maintained in
clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipe lines and other equipments shall be
thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.

5.12. PROCEDURE FOR PLACING OF CONCRETE:

5.12.1. Before any concrete is placed the entire placing programme consisting of equipment, layout,
proposed procedures and methods shall be submitted to Client/PMC for approval if so
demanded by the Client/PMC and no concrete shall be placed until Client/PMC’s approval

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 50

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

has been obtained. Equipment for conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to
ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete during depositing without segregation of
materials considering the size of the job and placement location.

5.12.2. Concrete shall be placed in its final position before the cement reaches its initial set and
concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of leaving the
mixer and once compacted it shall not be disturbed.

5.12.3. In all cases the concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final
position and shall not be re-handled or caused to flow in a manner which may cause
segregation, loss of materials, displacement of reinforcement, shuttering or embedded
inserts or impair its strength. For locations where direct placement is not possible and in
narrow forms contractor shall provide suitable drop and Elephant Trunks to confine the
movement of concrete. Special care shall be taken where concrete is dropped from a height
especially if reinforcement is in the way particularly in columns and thin walls.

5.12.4. Except when otherwise approved by Client/PMC concrete shall be placed in the shuttering
by shovels or other approved implements and shall not be dropped from a height more than
one metre or handle in a manner which will cause segregation.

5.12.5. The following specification shall apply when placing of concrete by use of mechanical
equipment is specifically called for while inviting bids or is warranted considering the nature
of work involved:

5.12.6. Concrete placed in restricted forms by borrows, buggies, cars, sort chutes or hand shoveling
shall be subjected to the requirement for vertical delivery of limited height to avoid
segregation and shall deposited as nearly as practicable in it’s final position.

5.12.7. Concreting once started shall be continuous until the pour is completed. Concrete shall be
placed in successive horizontal layers of uniform thickness ranging from 150mm to 900mm
as directed by the Client/PMC. These shall be placed as rapidly as practicable to prevent the
formation of cold joints or planes of weakness between each succeeding layers within the
pour. The thickness of each layer shall be such that it can be deposited before the previous
layer has stiffened. The bucket loads or other units of deposit shall be spotted progressively
along the face of the layer with such overlap as will facilitate spreading the layer to uniform
depth and texture with a minimum of shoveling. Any tendency to segregation shall be
corrected by shoveling stones into mortar rather than mortar onto stones. Such a condition
shall be corrected by redesign of mix or other means as directed by Client/PMC.

5.12.8. The top surface of each pour and bedding planes shall be approximately horizontal unless
otherwise instructed.

5.13. COMPACTION:

5.13.1. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment until the
concrete has been consolidated to the maximum practicable density, is free of pockets of
coarse aggregate and fits tightly against all form surfaces, reinforcement and embedded
fixtures. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all concrete placed against the form
faces and into corners of forms or against hardened concrete at joints is free from voids or

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 51

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

cavities. The use of vibrators shall be consistent with the concrete mix and caution is to be
exercised not to over vibrate the concrete to the point that segregation results.

5.13.2. When placing in layers, which are advancing horizontally as the work, progresses great care
shall be exercised to ensure adequate vibration, blending and melding of the concrete
between the successive layers.

5.13.3. The immersion vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed and also penetrate the layer
below while the under layers is still plastic to ensure good bond and homogeneity between
the two layers and prevent the formation of cold joints.

5.13.4. Care shall be taken to prevent contact of immersion vibrators against reinforcement steel.
Immersion vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement steel after
start of initial set. They shall also not be allowed to come into contact with forms or finished
surfaces.

5.13.5. Formation of stone pockets or mortar bondages in corners and against faces of forms shall
not be permitted. Should these occur they shall be dug out, reform and refilled to a
sufficient depth and shape for thorough bonding as directed by Client/PMC.

5.13.6. Bleeding or free water on top of concrete being deposited into the forms shall be caused to
stop the concrete pour and the condition causing this defect corrected before any further
concreting is resumed.

5.14. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS:

5.14.1. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of the part of the work
between predetermined construction joints as specified therein after. Time laps between
the pouring of adjoining units shall be as specified in the drawings or as directed by the
Client/PMC.

5.14.2. If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere a properly formed construction

joints shall be made where the work is stopped.

5.14.3. Joints shall be either vertical or horizontal unless otherwise shown on drawing. In case of an
inclined or curved member the joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the member.
Vertical joints in walls shall be kept to a minimum.

5.14.4. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board and horizontal joints shall be level and
wherever possible arranged so that the joint lines coincide with the architectural features of
the finished work.

5.14.5. Batten shall be nailed to the form work to ensure a horizontal line and if directed shall also
be used to form a grooved joint. For tank walls and similar work joints shall be formed as per
I.S.3370.

5.14.6. Concrete that is in the process of setting shall not be disturbed or shaken by traffic either on
the concrete itself or upon the shuttering.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 52

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.14.7. Horizontal and vertical joints and shear keys shall be located and shall confirm in details to
the requirements of the plans unless otherwise directed by the Client/PMC.

5.14.8. Column Joints:

In a column joints shall be formed 75mm below the lowest soffit of the beam including
haunches if any. In flat slab construction the joint shall be 75mm below the soffit of column
capital. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in columns, piers or walls
before depositing in beams, girders or slabs supported thereon.

5.14.9. Beam and Slab Joints:

Concrete in beam shall be placed throughout without a joint but if the joint is unavoidable
the same shall be vertical and at the centre or within the middle third of the span unless
otherwise shown on drawings. Where a beam intersects a girder the joints in the girder shall
be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam and additional reinforcement
provided for shear. The joint shall be vertical throughout the full thickness of the concrete
member. A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal reinforcement. Where
it is unavoidably at right angles to the principal reinforcement the joint shall be vertical and
at the middle of the span.

5.14.10. Vertical construction joints in water tight construction will not be permitted unless indicated
on the drawings. Where a horizontal construction joint is required to resist water pressure
special care shall be taken in all phases of its construction to ensure maximum water
tightness.

5.15. DOWELS:

5.15.1. Dowels for concrete works not likely to be taken up in the near future shall be wrapped in
tar paper and burlap.

5.16. MASS FOUNDATIONS:

5.16.1. Mass foundation shall be poured in lifts not exceeding 1.5 m in height unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings or approved by Client/PMC.

5.17. TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ON RESUMING CONCRETING:

5.17.1. A dryer mix shall be used for the top lift of horizontal pours to avoid laitance. All laitance and
loose stones shall be thoroughly and carefully removed by wire brushing/ hacking and
surface wash.

5.17.2. Just before concreting is resumed the roughened joint surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
and loose matter removed and then treated with a thin layer of cement grout of proportion
specified by Client/PMC and worked will into the surface. The new concrete shall be well
worked against the prepared face before the grout mortar sets. Special care shall be taken
to obtained thorough compaction and to avoid segregation of the concrete along the joint
plane.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 53

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.18. CURING, PROTECTING, REPAIRING AND FINISHING:

5.18.1. All concrete shall be cured by keeping it continuously damp for a period of time required for
complete hydration and hardening to take place. Preference shall be given to the use of
continuous sprays or by ponding of water, continuously saturated coverings of sacking,
canvas, hessian (especially on vertical structural members) or other absorbent materials or
approved effective curing compounds applied with spraying equipment capable of
producing a smooth even textured coat. Extra precautions shall be exercised in curing
concrete during cold and hot weather as outlined hereinafter.

5.18.2. Certain type of finish or preparation for overlaying concrete must be done at certain stages
of the curing process and special treatment may be required for specific concrete surface
finish.

5.18.3. Curing With Water:

5.18.3.1. Fresh concrete shall be kept continuously wet for a minimum period of 10days from the date
of placing of concrete following a lapse of 10 to 12 hours after laying of concrete in normal
weather and in hot weather not more than lapse of 4 hours. Date of casting shall have to be
marked, as directed by Client/PMC, on the exposed surfaces of the concrete so as to enable
easy monitoring of the curing period.

5.18.3.2. The curing of horizontal surface exposed to the drying winds shall be however begin
immediately after the concrete has hardened. Water shall be applied to unformed concrete
surfaces within one hour after concrete has set. Water shall be applied to formed surface
immediately upon removal of forms. Quantity of water applied shall be controlled so as to
prevent erosion of freshly placed concrete.

5.18.3.3. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for mixing concrete.

5.18.3.4. Curing shall be assured by use of an ample water supply under pressure in pipes with all
necessary appliances of hose, sprinklers and spraying devices. Continuous fine moist
spraying or sprinkling shall be used unless otherwise specified or approved by the
Client/PMC.

5.18.3.5. For curing of concrete in pavements, side-walks, floors flat roofs or other level surfaces the
ponding method of curing is preferred. The method of containing the ponded water shall be
approved by the Client/PMC. Special attention shall be given to edges and corners of the
slab to ensure proper protection to these areas. The ponded areas shall be kept
continuously filled with water during the curing period.

5.18.3.6. All equipments and materials required for curing shall be on and ready for use before
concrete is placed.

5.19. FINISHING OF CONCRETE:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 54

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.19.1. This specification is intended to cover the treatment of concrete surface for all structures.
Areas requiring special finish not covered by this specification shall be clearly indicated on
the drawings and special specification shall be furnished.

5.19.2. When specified on the drawings an integral cement concrete finish of specified thickness for
floors and slabs shall be applied either monolithic or bonded as specified on the drawings
and as per I.S.2571.

5.19.3. The surface shall be compacted and then floated with a wooden float or power floating
machine. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge and any high and low spots
eliminated.

5.19.4. Floating or trowelling of the finish shall be permitted only after all surface water has
evaporated. Dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand shall not be sprinkled directly
on the surface of the concrete finish to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix.

5.19.5. A rubbed finish shall be provided only on exposed concrete surfaces as specified on the
drawings.

5.19.6. Upon removal of forms all fins and other projections on the surfaces shall be carefully
removed, offsets leveled voids and /or damaged sections immediately saturated with water
and repaired by filling with concrete or mortar of the same composition as was used in the
concrete.

5.19.7. The finished surfaces shall present a uniform and smooth appearance.

5.19.8. All concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance by the Client/PMC.

5.20. CONCRETE FINISHES:

5.20.1. Unless otherwise specified concrete finishes shall confirm to the following specifications:

5.20.1.1. Finish F1, F2 and F3 shall describe formed surfaces.

5.20.1.2. Finish U1, U2 and U3 shall describe unformed surfaces.

5.20.1.3. Offsets or fins caused by disposed or misplaced from sheathing, lining or form sections or by
defective form lumber shall be referred to as abrupt irregularities.

5.20.1.4. All other irregularities shall be referred as gradual irregularities. Gradual irregularities shall
be measured as deviation from a plane surface with a template 1500mm long for formed
surface and 3000mm long for unformed surfaces.

5.20.2. Formed Surfaces:

5.20.2.1. Finish F1 shall apply to all formed surfaces for which finish F2 and F3 or any other special
finish is not specified and shall include filling up all form tie holes.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 55

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.20.2.2. Finish F2 shall apply to all formed surfaces as shown on the drawings or specified by the
Client/PMC. This shall include filling all form tie holes, repair of gradual irregularities
exceeding 6mm removal of ridges and abrupt irregularities by grinding.

5.20.2.3. Finish F3 shall apply to all formed surfaces exposed to view or where shown in the drawings
or specified by the Client/PMC. Finish F3 shall include all measures specified for Finish F2
and in addition filling air holes with mortar and treatment of the entire surface with sack
rubbed finish. It shall also include clean up of loose and adhering debris. Where a sack
rubbed finish is specified the surfaces shall be prepared within two days after removal of the
forms.

5.20.2.3.1. The surface shall be wetted and allowed to dry slightly before mortar is applied by sack
rubbing. The mortar used shall consist of one part of cement to one and half parts of fine
sand (minus No.16 mesh) by volume. Only sufficient mixing water to give the mortar a
workable consistency shall be used.

5.20.2.3.2. The mortar shall then be rubbed over the surface with a fine burlap or linen cloth so as to fill
all the surface voids.

5.20.2.3.3. The mortar rubbed in the voids shall be allowed to stiffen and solidify after which the whole
surface shall be wiped clean so that the surface presents a uniform appearance without air
holes, irregularities etc.

5.20.2.4. Curing of the surface shall be continued for a period of ten days.

5.20.3. Unformed Surfaces:

5.20.3.1. Finish U1 shall apply to all unformed surfaces for which the finish U2, U3 or any other special
finish is not specified and shall include screeding the surface of the concrete to the required
slope and grade.

5.20.3.1.1. Unless the drawing specifies a horizontal surface or shows required the slope the top of the
narrow surfaces such as stairs, treads, walls, curbs and parapets shall be sloped
approximately 10mm per 300mm width.

5.20.3.1.2. The surfaces to be covered by back fill or concrete sub floors to be covered with concrete
topping, terrazzo and similar surfaces shall be smooth screeded and leveled to produce even
surface, irregularities not exceeding 6mm.

5.20.3.2. Finish U2 shall apply to all unformed surfaces as shown in the drawing or specified by the
Client/PMC and shall include screeding and applying a wood float finish to the surface of the
concrete to the required slopes and grade.

Repair of abrupt irregularities unless a roughened texture is specified. Repair of gradual

irregularities exceeding 6mm.

5.20.3.3. Finish U3 shall apply to unformed surfaces for which a high degree of surface smoothness is
required where shown on the drawing or as specified by the Client/PMC. This shall include

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 56

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

screeding, floating and applying a steel trowel finish to the surface of the concrete to the
required slopes and grade.

5.20.3.3.1. Repair of abrupt irregularities and gradual irregularities exceeding 6mm, finishing joints and
edges of concrete with edging tools.

5.21. MODE OF MEASUREMENTS:

5.21.1. The concrete as actually done shall be measured for payment. Any work done excess over
the specified dimensions for the section shown in the drawing or as required by the
Client/PMC shall not be measured for payment.

5.21.2. Dimensions of length, breadth and thickness shall be measured correct to nearest
centimetres except for the thickness of slab, which shall be measured to nearest 5mm.

5.21.3. Areas shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 square metre and the cubic contents of
consolidated concrete shall be worked out to nearest 0.001 cubic metres.

5.21.4. For the purpose of measurements and payments for all concrete works I.S.1200 (Part-II)
shall be referred.

5.22. Control Joint / Dummy Joint:

These joints shall be founded at 5 M to 6 M intervals. The width of the joint shall be 8 to
10mm and the depth shall be 25mm. The edges shall be rounded with an edging tool.

The joint shall be filled with the joint sealing compound of IS:1834-1961 for hot applied
sealing compounds for joints in concrete.

The unit of measurement will be running metre including cost of sealing compound.

5.23. PLAIN CEMENT CONCERTE FOR GENERAL WORK:

For plain cement concrete work, the specifications for materials viz., cement, sand, fine and
coarse aggregates and water shall be the same as that specified in reinforced work
specification. But the proportion of mix will be nominal and the ratio of fine and coarse
aggregate may be slightly adjusted with in limits keeping the total volume of aggregates to a
given volume cement constant, to suit the sieve analysis of the aggregates. Cement shall on
no account be measured by volume, both it shall always be used directly from the bags (i.e.,
50 Kg/bag).

The proportion of cement, sand, aggregate for concrete of proportion 1:4:8, 1:3:6, 1:2:4 by
volumes shall generally consist of quantities as given below:

Proportions of Quantity of materials used per bag of Cement

ingredients Cement Sand Coarse aggregate Water
1:4:8 1 130 Liters 272 Liters 39 Liters

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 57

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

1:3:6 1 102 Liters 204 Liters 34 Liters

1:2:4 1 68 Liters 136 Liters 30 Liters

The quantity of water used shall be such as to produce concrete of consistency required by
the particular class or work and shall be decided by the use of slump cone. Sufficient care
should be taken to see that no excess quantity of water is used. The final proportion of the
aggregates and the quantity of water shall be decided by the Client/PMC on the basis of test
in each case. The slum shall be specified for each class of work and shall in general be as
follows:-

Type of concrete mix Slum (Millimetres)

Mass concrete 50
Roads and pavements hand finished 100
Roads and pavements machine finished 25
Floor paving 50

All plain concrete shall be preferably mixed in a drum type power driven machine with a
loading hopper, which will permit the accurate measure of various ingredients. If hand
mixing is authorized, it should be done on a watertight platform.

The mixing of each batch in the concrete mixer shall continue for not less than 2 minutes
after the materials and water are in the mixer. The volume of mixed materials per batch
shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rated capacity of the mixer. The mixer shall rotate at a
peripheral speed of about 60 metres per minute.

Concrete shall be poured and consolidated in its final position within half an hour of mixing.
The re-tempering of concrete, which has partially hardened, that is remixing with or without
additional cement, aggregate or water shall not be permitted. Concrete in c.c. 1:2:4 will be
required to be vibrated if specified and directed by the Client/PMC. In case if the thickness
of concrete is more than 150mm in thickness, it may be vibrated if directed by the
Client/PMC.

The concrete shall be cured for 10days in ordinary weather and 15days in cold weather.
Measurements for the work done shall be exact length, breadth and depth shown or figured
on the drawings or as instructed by the Client/PMC and after the concrete is consolidated.
No extra shall be paid for excess quantity resulting from faulty workmanship.

5.24. SPECIFICATIONS FOR READY MIXED CONCRETE (RMC):

5.24.1. The supply of ready -mixed concrete shall be as specified in IS: 4926-1976. The strength of
RCC design mix shall be specified in the item.

5.24.2. TERMINOLOGY

5.24.2.1. For the purpose of this standard the definitions in 5.2.2 to 5.2.5 shall apply.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 58

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.24.2.2. Ready-mixed Concrete – Concrete delivered at site in plastic condition and requiring no
further treatment before being placed in the position in which it is to set and harden.

5.24.2.3. Agitation – The process of continuing the mixing of concrete at a reduced speed during
transportation to prevent segregation.

5.24.2.4. Agitator – Truck mounted equipment designed to agitate concrete during transportation to
the site of delivery.

5.24.2.5. Truck – Mixer – A mixer generally mounted on a self-propelled chasis capable of mixing the
ingredients of concrete and of agitating the mixed concrete during transportation.

5.24.3. TYPES OF MIXING

5.24.3.1. For the purpose of this standard, the ready-mixed concrete shall be of the following type,
according to the method of production and delivery as specified in 5.3.2.

5.24.3.2. Centrally Mixed Concrete – Concrete produced by completely mixing cement, aggregates,
admixtures, if any and water at a central mixing plant and delivered in containers fitted with
agitating devices.

5. 24.4. MATERIALS:

5.24.4.1. Materials such as cement, coarse & fine aggregates, water & admixture, etc. shall confirm to
the specifications mentioned in the RCC works. Use of mineral admixtures like fly ash,
GGBFS, etc. shall not be permitted unless otherwise specifically permitted by Client/PMC.
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement -43grade/ Portland Pozzolana cement (Fly ash
based meeting the 28day strength requirement of OPC 43grade cement) only.

5.24.5. BASIS OF SUPPLY

5. 24.5.1. The ready-mixed concrete shall be manufactured and supplied on the following basis:
a)Specified strength based on 28days compressive strength of 15 cm cubes tested in
accordance with IS: 456-2000.

5.24.5.2. The responsibility for the design of mix shall be that of the manufacturer and the concrete
shall confirm to the requirements as specified in 5.7.

5.24.6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.24.6.1. The ready-mixed concrete shall generally comply with the requirements of IS:456
considering as ‘severe’ environment.

5.24.6.2. Minimum quantity of cement and the details regarding proportionary works control shall be
in accordance with IS: 456.

5.24.6.3. The concrete shall be delivered to the site of work and discharge shall be complete within ½
hour (when the prevailing atmospheric temperature is above 20o C) and within 2 hours
(when the prevailing atmospheric temperature is at or below 20o C) of adding the mixing

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 59

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

water to the mix of cement and aggregate or of adding the cement to the aggregate
whichever is earlier.

5.24.6.4. Sampling and Testing:

5.24.6.4.1. Adequate facilities shall be provided by the manufacturer for purchaser to inspect the
materials used, the process of manufacture and methods of delivery of concrete. He shall
also provide adequate facilities for the purchaser to take samples of the materials used.

5.24.6.4.2. Sampling and Testing – The sampling and testing of concrete shall be done in accordance
with the relevant requirements of IS:456-2000, IS: 1199-1959 and IS: 516-1959.

5.24.6.4.3. Consistency or Workability – The testes for consistency or workability shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of IS: 1199-1959 or by such other method as may be
agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

5.24.6.4.4. Strength Test – The compressive strength and flexural strength tests shall be carried out in
accordance with requirements of IS: 516-1959 and the acceptance criteria for concrete
supplied on the basis of specified strength shall conform to the requirements of IS: 456.

5.24.6.4.5. Cost of Testing – The cost of the tests carried out in accordance with requirements of this
specification shall be borne by the contractor.

5.24.6.4.6. Manufacturer’s Records and Certificates - The manufacturer shall keep batch records of the
quantities by mass of all solid materials, of total amount of water used in mixing and of the
results of all tests. If required by the purchaser, the manufacturer shall furnish certificate, at
agreed intervals, giving this information.

5.24.7. CONCRETE MANUFACTURED AND SUPPLIED ON THE BASIS OF SPECIFIED STRENGTH.

5.24.7.1. The manufacturer shall supply the following information for guidance of the supplier for
approval:

a). The type of cement to be used.

b). The maximum size and type of aggregates.

c). The type of admixtures to be used.

d). The minimum accepted compressive strength or flexural strength or both, determined
from samples of plastic concrete taken at the place and time of delivery, in accordance
with requirements of IS: 456-2000.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 60

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

e). The slump or compacting factor or both, or other requirement for consistency or
workability at the place and time of delivery of the concrete.

f). The ages at which the test cubes or beams are to be tested and the frequency and
number of tests to be made shall be as required by the purchaser.

5.24.7.2. Tolerances – The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of this
specification, if the results of the tests where applicable, lie within the tolerances specified
in 5.7.2.1.

5.24.7.2.1. Consistency or Workability – The slump (average of two tests) shall not differ from the
specified value by +10mm for a specified slump of 75mm or less and +25mm when the
specified slump is greater than 75mm. The compacting factor average of two tests shall be
within + 0.03 of the value specified. The test for consistency or workability shall be
completed within 15minutes of the time of receipt of the ready-mixed concrete at site.

5.24.8. PLACING OF READY-MIXED CONCRETE:

The ready-mixed concrete shall be placed in the required location/position, level, heights,
etc. by using pumping arrangement method/mechanically as directed by the Client/PMC.

5.25. SPECIFICATION FOR RUBBER / P.V.C. WATER STOPS:

5.25.1. GENERAL:

The corrugated Rubber/PVC water stops with centre bulb of specified width, shall be of
approved manufacture and shall satisfy all the normal tests such as tensile strength,
elongation etc.

5.25.2. SAMPLE:

A sample of Rubber/PVC water stops shall be got approved from the Client/PMC before
procurement of bulk quantity.

5.25.3. PLACING IN POSITION:

5.25.3.1. The water stops shall be provided in available maximum length and as far as possible,
jointing shall be avoided. All the joints when unavoidable shall be field jointed for water
tightness as per manufacturer’s specifications.

5.25.3.2. The water-stops shall be positioned with suitable temporary supports so as to render
adequate rigidity to the water stops while concreting. The exposed surfaces of water stops
revealed after first concreting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all the droppings, mortar
splashing, timber scantlings sticking etc. Before the next pour of concrete is taken up in
hand. Any damage caused to water stops shall be made good by the contractor at his own
cost.

5.25.4. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 61

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

5.25.4.1. The mode of measurements shall be in running metre, of water stop actually laid without
any allowance for laps, wastage etc., measured correct to one centimetre.

5.25.4.2. Rate shall include supply, transport, fixing, welding, supporting arrangements, cleaning etc.
all as described above.

-------End of Section-5-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 62

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-6-FORM WORK:

6.1. SCOPE:

6.1.1. The formwork shall consists of shores, bracings, side of beams and columns, bottom of slabs,
etc. including ties, anchors, hangars, inserts, etc. complete which shall be properly designed
and planned for the works.

6.1.2. The formwork shall be so constructed that up and down vertical adjustments can be made
smoothly. Wedges may be used at top or bottom of shores, but not at both the ends to
facilitate vertical adjustment for dismantling of the formwork.

6.2. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS:

6.2.1. The relevant IS specification, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification. All standards, specifications, code of practices refer to herein shall be the
latest edition including all applicable amendments, revisions and additional publications.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:303 Plywood for general purpose
2. IS: 1200 (Part V) Method of Measurement of building and civil engineering
work (Form work)
3. IS: 2750 Specification for steel scaffolding
4. IS: 3696 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders
5. IS: 4014 (Part I) Code of Practice for steel tubular scaffolding
6. IS: 4014 (Part II) Code of Practice for steel tubular scaffolding
7. IS: 4990 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work

6.3. DESIGN OF FORMWORK:

6.3.1. The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be the
responsibility of the contractor. If so instructed, the drawings and calculations for the design
of the formwork shall be submitted well in advance to the Client/pmc for approval before
proceeding with the work at no extra cost to the Client. Client/PMC’s approval shall not
relieve the contractor of the full responsibility for the design and construction of the
formwork.

6.3.2. The design shall take into account all the loads vertical as well as lateral that the forms will
be carrying including live load and vibration loads.

6.3.3. Depending upon the height of the staging suitable vertical and horizontal cross bracings shall
be provided.

6.3.4. The contractor shall note that no concrete work of floor, beam, slab including roof slab will
be permitted unless the staging work is inspected and the approval in writing for its
soundness is given to the Client/PMC prior to commencement of concrete work.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 63

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.4. TOLERANCES:

6.4.1. Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grade or dimensions given in the
drawings. No tolerance specified for horizontal and vertical building lines or footings shall be
considered to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries. Unless otherwise
specified, following tolerances shall be permitted.

6.4.1.1. Tolerance for R.C. Building:

6.4.1.1.1. Variation from the plumb:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. In the line and surface of columns, 5mm per 2.50M but not more than
piers, walls and buttresses. 25mm.
2. For exposed corner columns and In any bay or 5M maximum: (+/-) 5mm.
other conspicuous lines. In 10M or more: (+/-) 10mm.

6.4.1.1.2. Variation from the level or frame the grade indicated in the drawings:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits In 2.50 M: (+/-) 5mm
and staircases. In any bay or 5M maximum: (+/-) 8mm.
In 10 M or more: (+/-) 15mm
2. For exposed lintels, parapets, In any bay or 5M maximum: (+/-) 5mm.
horizontal grooves and other In 10 M or more: (+/-) 10mm.
conspicuous lines.

6.4.1.1.3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of
columns, walls and partitions:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. In any bay or 5 M maximum (+/-)5mm
2. In 10 M or more (+/-)20mm

6.4.1.1.4.

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, openings in (+/-)5mm
walls and floors except in the case of anchor bolts

6.4.1.1.5.

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and (-) 5mm and
beams and thickness of slabs and walls. (+)10mm

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 64

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.4.1.1.6. Footings:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. Variation in dimension in plan (-) 5mm and (+)50mm.
2. Misplacement or eccentricity in the 0.02 times the width of the footing in the
direction of misplacement direction of the deviation but not more
than 50mm.
3. Reduction in thickness (+/-) 0.05 times the specified thickness

6.1.1.7. Variation in steps:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. In a flight of stairs riser (+/-) 3mm
2. In a flight of stairs tread (+/-) 5mm
3. In consecutive steps riser (+/-) 1.5mm
4. In consecutive steps tread (+/-) 3mm

6.4.1.2. Tolerances in other Concrete structures:

6.4.1.2.1. All Structures:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. Variation of the constructed linear (+/-) 10mm in 5 M (+/-) 15mm in 10 M or
outline from established position in more
plan.
2. Variation of dimensions to individual (+/-) 25mm in 20 M or more (+/-) 50mm
structure features from established in buried construction
positions in plan.
3. Variation from plumb specified batter (+/-) 10mm in 2.50 M (+/-) 15mm in 5 M
or curved surfaces of all structures. (+/-) 25mm in 10 M or more (+/-) Twice
the above amounts in buried
construction.
4. Variation from level or grade (+/-) 5mm in 2.50 M (+/-) 10mm in 7.5 M
indicated on drawings in slabs and or more (+/-) Twice the above amounts
beams soffits, horizontal grooves and in buried construction
visible arises
5. Variation in cross sectional (-) 5mm and (+) 10mm
dimensions of columns, beams,
buttresses, piers and similar
members
6. Variation in the thickness of slabs, (-) 5mm and (+) 10mm
walls, arch sections and similar
members

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 65

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.4.1.2.2. Footings for columns, piers, walls, buttresses and similar members:

Sl.No. Building Members Tolerances

1. Variation in dimension in plan (-) 10mm and (+) 50mm
2. Misplacement or eccentricity in 0.02times the width of the footing in the
the direction of misplacement direction of the deviation but not more than
50mm
3. Reduction in thickness (+/-) 0.05 times the specified thickness

6.4.1.2.3. Tolerances in other types of structures shall generally conform to those given in clause 2.4
of recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork (ACI 347).

6.5. TYPE OF FORMWORK:

6.5.1. Formwork may be of timber, plywood, metal, plastic or concrete. For special finishes the
formwork may be lined with plywood, steel sheets, oil tempered hard board, etc. sliding
forms and slip forms may be used with the approval of Client/PMC.

6.6. FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS:

6.6.1. Forms shall conform to the shapes, lines, grades and dimensions including camber of the
concrete as called for on the drawings. Ample studs, waler braces, ties, straps, shores, etc.
shall be used to hold the forms in proper position without any distortion whatsoever until
the concrete has set sufficiently to permit removal of forms. Form shall be strong enough to
permit the use of immersion vibrators; in special case form vibrators may also be used. The
shuttering shall be close boarded. Timber shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes,
loose knots, worm holes, warps or other surface defects in contact with concrete shall be
free from adhering grout, plaster, paint, projecting nails, splits or other defects. Joints shall
be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of water and fine material from concrete.

6.6.2. Plywood shall be used for exposed concrete surface where called for. Sawn and wrought
timber may be used for unexposed surfaces. Inside faces of forms for concrete surface,
which are to be rubbed finished shall be planed to remove irregularities or unevenness in
the face. Formwork with lining will be permitted.

6.6.3. All new and used form timber shall be maintained in a good condition with respect to shape,
strength, rigidity, water tightness, smoothness and cleanliness of surfaces. Form timber
unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be used and if rejected by the Client/PMC shall be
removed from the site.

6.6.4. Shores supporting successive stories shall be placed directly over those below or be so
designed and placed that the load will be transmitted directly on them. Trussed supports
shall be provided for shores that can be secured on adequate foundation.

6.6.5. Form work during any stage of construction showing signs of distortion or disturbed to such
a degree that the intended concrete work will not conform to the exact contours indicated
on the drawings shall be re-positioned and strengthened. Poured concrete affected by
faulty formwork shall be removed entirely and the formwork shall be corrected prior to
placing new concrete.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 66

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.6.6. Excessive construction camber to compensate for shrinkage settlement etc. that may impair
the structural strength of the members will not be permitted.

6.6.6.1. Forms for substructure concrete may be omitted in the opinion of the Client/PMC the open
excavation is firm enough to act as the form. Such excavation shall be slightly larger than
that required by drawings to compensate for irregularities in excavation and to ensure the
design requirement.

6.6.7. Forms shall be designed and constructed that they can be stripped in order required and
their removal do not damage the concrete. Face form work shall provide true vertical and
horizontal joints conforming to the architectural features of the structure as to location of
joints and be as directed by the Client/PMC.

6.6.8. Where exposed smooth or rubbed concrete finishes are required, the forms shall be
constructed with special care so that the desired concrete surfaces could be obtained which
require a minimum finish.

6.7. BRACINGS, STRUTS AND PROPS:

6.7.1. Shuttering shall be braced, strutted, propped and so supported that it shall not deform
under weight and pressure of the concrete and also due to the movement of men and other
materials. Bamboos shall not be used as props or cross bracings.

6.7.2. The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the shuttering on the sides of the
beams and under the soffit of slab can be removed without disturbing the beam bottoms.

6.7.3 Re-propping of the beams shall not be done except when the props have to be reinstalled to
take care of construction loads anticipated being excess of the design load. Vertical props
shall be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken whereby the props can be
gently lowered vertically while striking the shuttering.

6.7.4. If the shuttering for a column is erected for the full height of the column, one side shall be
left open and built upon sections as placing of concrete proceeds or windows may be left for
pouring concrete from sides to limit the drop of concrete to one metre or as directed by the
Client/PMC.

6.8. FORM OIL:

6.8.1. Use of the form oil shall not be permitted on the surface that requires painting. If the
contractor desires to use form oil on the inside of form work of the other concrete surfaces,
a non staining mineral oil or other approved oil ‘CEMOL-35’ of M/s Hindustan Petroleum Co.
Ltd. or equivalent may be used provided it is applied before placing of reinforcing steel and
embedded parts. 8.2All excess oil on the form surfaces and any oil on metal or other parts
to be embedded in the concrete shall be carefully removed. Before treatment with oil forms
shall be thoroughly cleared of dried splatter of concrete from placement of previous lift.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 67

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.9. CHAMFERS AND FILLETS:

6.9.1. All corners and angles in the finished structure shall be formed with mouldings to form
chamfers or fillets on the finished concrete. The standard dimensions of chamfers and fillets
unless otherwise specified shall be 20mmx20mm. Care shall be exercised to ensure accurate
mouldings. The diagonal face of the moulding shall be planed or surface to the same texture
as the forms to which it is attached.

6.9.2. Vertical construction joints on faces which will be exposed at the completion of the work
shall be chamfered as above except where not permitted by Client/PMC for structural or
hydraulic reasons.

6.10. WALL TIES:

6.10.1. Wall ties passing through the walls shall not be allowed. Also through bolts shall not be
permitted.

For fixing of formwork alternate arrangements such as coil nuts shall be adopted at the
contractor’s cost.

6.11. REUSE OF FORMS:

6.11.1. Before reuse all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes that may
leak suitably plugged and joints examined and when necessary repaired and the inside
retreated to prevent adhesion to the satisfaction of Client/PMC. Warped timber shall be
resized. Contractor shall equip himself with enough shuttering to complete the job in the
stipulated time.

6.12. REMOVAL OF FORMS:

6.12.1. Contractor shall record in the drawings or a special register the date upon which the
concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which the shuttering is removed
there from.

6.12.2. In no circumstances shall form struck until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice
the stress due to self weight and any construction/erection loading to which the concrete
may be subjected at the time of striking of formwork. The strength referred to shall be that
of concrete using the same cement and aggregates and admixture, if any, with the same
proportions and cured under conditions of temperature and moisture similar to those
existing on the work.

6.12.3. In normal circumstances where the ambient temperature does not fall below 15oC and
where Ordinary Portland Cement is used and adequate curing is done the stripping time is
to be followed as specified in IS: 456-2000 (clause 11.3).

6.12.4. Striking shall be done slowly with utmost care to avoid damage to arise and projections and
without shock or vibration by gentling easing the wedges. If after removing the formwork it
is founds that timber has been embedded in the concrete, it shall be removed and made
good as specified earlier.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 68

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

6.12.5. Reinforced temporary openings shall be provided as directed by the Client/PMC to facilitate
removal of formwork which otherwise may be inaccessible.

6.12.6. Tie rods, clamps, form bolts, etc. which must be entirely removed from walls or similar
structure shall be loosened not sooner than 16 hours not later than 24 hours (in case the
conditions in 12.3 are satisfied) after the concrete has been deposited. Ties except those
required to hold the forms in place may be removed at the same time. Ties withdrawn from
walls and grade beams shall be pulled towards the inside face. Cutting ties back from the
faces of forms and grade beams will not be permitted. Work damaged due to premature or
careless removal of forms, any undulation in exposed concrete surface due to sag /
settlement or movement of supports found after removal of shuttering shall be
reconstructed or rectified to the satisfaction of the Client/PMC by the contractor at his own
risk and cost. Abrupt changes in surface of concrete, mortar fins at formwork joints shall be
made even by chipping, grinding and finishing with cement mortar, curing, etc. as directed
by Client/PMC at his own cost.

6.13. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

6.13.1. The net area of exposed surfaces of concrete members as shown in the drawings coming in
contact with form work shall be measured under item of form work in square metre.

6.13.2. The dimensions of the formwork shall be measured correct to a centimetre.

6.13.3. No deductions shall be made from the shuttering for openings/obstructions up to an area of

0.10 m2 and nothing extra shall be paid of forming such opening.

6.13.4. For the purpose of measurements for formwork IS: 1200 (Part V) shall be referred.

6.14. SPECIFICATION FOR STAGING WORK:

6.14.1. The contractor shall note that only steel tubular staging (acrow type or equivalent) shall be
used for all RCC beams, slabs, etc. at all floor levels and the same shall be designed by him
and the detailed drawings and the design calculations shall be submitted for the approval of
Client/PMC at least two months in advance of the scheduled date of its erection at site.
Depending upon the height of the staging, suitable vertical and horizontal cross bracings
shall be provided. The contractor shall note that no concreting of floor beams, stairs and
slabs including roof slab will be permitted unless the staging work is inspected and approval
in writing for its soundness by the Client/PMC is given prior to the commencement of
concreting.

-------End of Section-6-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 69

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-7-STEEL REINFORCEMENT WORKS:

7.1. GENERAL:

7.1.1. Steel reinforcement bars, if supplied or arranged by the contractor, shall be either plain
round mild steel bars grade- I or medium tensile steel bars as per IS: 432 or hot rolled mild
steel and medium tensile deformed as per IS: 1139 or Thermo-mechanically treated (TMT)
bars - high yield strength deformed bars as per IS:1786 as shown and specified on the
drawings and shall be manufactured by M/s SAIL or TISCO or RINL only and shall be rolled
from their own plants and from virgin material. Materials manufactured by their authorized
conversion agents and re-rollers shall not be accepted. Documentary evidence of purchasing
steel produced from these manufacturers and their manufacturing test certificate shall be
submitted. The third party test shall be carried out as directed in line with the relevant
Indian standards and cost of which shall be included in the item rate and no separate
payment shall be made on account of this.

7.1.2. Wire mesh or fabric shall be in accordance with IS:1566.

7.1.3. Substitution of reinforcement will not be permitted except upon written approval from
Client/PMC.

7.2. SCOPE:

7.2.1. This specification covers the general requirements for quality, storage, bending and fixing of
reinforcement.

7.3. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS:

7.3.1. The relevant IS specification, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification. All standards, specifications, code of practices refer to herein shall be the
latest edition including all applicable amendments, revisions and additional publications.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS: 432 (Part I) Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel bars and Hard drawn
Steel Wires for concrete reinforcement.
2. IS: 432 (Part II) Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel bars and Hard drawn
steel wires for concrete reinforcement.
3. IS: 1139 Specification for Hot Rolled Mild steel, Medium steel and HYSD
bars for concrete reinforcement.
4. IS:1200 Method of Measurement of Building and Civil Engineering
(Part VIII) work (Steel and Iron works)
5. IS: 1566 Hard drawn Steel Wire fabric for concrete reinforcement
6. IS: 1599 Method for Bend Test
7. IS: 1608 Method of Tensile Testing of Steel Products
8. IS: 1786 High Strength Deformed Steel and Wires for concrete
reinforcement
9. IS: 2502 Code of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for concrete
reinforcement.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 70

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

7.4. STORAGE:

7.4.1. The reinforcement shall not be kept in direct contact with the ground but stacked on top of
an arrangement of timber slippers or the like. The reinforcement shall be coated with
cement wash before stacking to prevent scale and rust. Fabricated reinforcement shall be
carefully stored to prevent damage, distortion, corrosion and deterioration.

7.5. QUALITY:

7.5.1. All steel shall be of grade-I quality unless specifically permitted by the Client/PMC. No re-
rolled material will be accepted. Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s test certificate
for steel.

7.5.2. Random test on steel supplied by the contractor may be performed by owner as per
relevant IS. All cost incidental to such tests shall be at the contractor’s expenses. Steel not
conforming to the specifications shall be rejected.

7.5.3. All reinforcement shall be clean, free from grease, oil, paint, dirt, loose mill scale, loose rust,
dust, bituminous material or any other substance that will destroy or reduce the bond. All
rods shall be thoroughly cleaned before being fabricated.

7.5.4. Pitted and defective rods shall not be used. All bars shall be rigidly held in position before
concreting. No welding of rods to obtain continuity shall be allowed unless approved by the
Client/PMC. If welding is approved the work shall be carried out as per IS: 2751, according
to best modern practices and as directed by the Client/PMC.

7.5.5. In all cases of important connections, test shall be made to prove that the joints are of the
full strength of the bar welded. Special precaution as specified by the Client/PMC shall be
taken in the welding of cold work reinforcing bars and bars other tan mild steel.

7.6. LAPS:

7.6.1. Laps and splices for reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings. Splices and adjacent
bars shall be staggered and the location of all splices except those specified on the drawings
shall be approved by the Client/PMC. The bars shall not be lapped unless the length
required exceeds the maximum available length required of bars at site.

7.7. BENDING:

7.7.1. All bars shall be accurately bent according to the size and shape shown on the detail
working drawing / bar bending schedule. They shall be gradually bent by machine or
approved means.

7.7.2. Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened and re-bend in the manner that will injure the
material. Bars containing cracks and splits shall be rejected. They shall be bent cold except
bars above 25mm in diametre which may be bent hot, if specifically approved by
Client/PMC.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 71

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

7.7.3. Bars which depend for their strength on cold working shall not be bent hot. Bars bent hot
shall not be heated beyond cherry-red color (not exceeding 645 o C) and after bending shall
be allowed to cool slowly without quenching.

7.7.4. Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for straightening and re-bending
be such as shall not in the opinion of the Client/PMC injure the material.

7.7.5. No reinforcement bars shall be bent when in position in the work without approval, whether
or not it is partially embedded in hardened concrete. Bars having kinks or bends other than
those required by the design shall not be used.

7.8. FIXING:

7.8.1. The reinforcement shall accurately be fixed by any approved means and maintained in the
correct position as shown in the drawing by use of blocks, spacers and chairs as per IS:2502
to prevent displacement during placing and compaction of concrete.

7.8.2. Bars intended to be in contact at crossing point shall be securely bound together at all such
points with 1.6mm diametre annealed soft iron wire.

7.8.3. The vertical distance required between successive layers of bars in beams or similar
members shall be maintained by provision of mild steel spacer bars at such intervals that
the main bar do not perpetually sag between adjacent spacer bars.

7.9. COVER TO REINFORCEMENT:

7.9.1. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawing, clear concrete cover for reinforcement
(exclusive of plaster or decorative finish) shall be as per the provisions of IS:456.

7.10. INSPECTION:

7.10.1. Erected and secured reinforcement shall be inspected and approved by the Client/PMC prior
to placement of concrete.

7.11. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

7.11.1. The actual quantity of reinforcement bars embedded in concrete as specified in the drawing
and as approved by the Client/PMC irrespective of the level or height at which the
reinforcement bars are placed shall be measured for payment. 11.2The reinforcement bars
shall be measured in length nearest to a centimetre for different diametres and their weight
shall be calculated based on the standard weights as per Indian Standard. 11.3Wastage,
unauthorized overlap and annealed steel binding wires shall not be measured for payment.
11.4Pins, chairs and spacers wherever required shall be provided As directed by the
Client/PMC and measured separately and paid for. 11.5The rate for reinforcement item shall
include the cost of labour and materials required for all operations described above
including transportation, cleaning, straightening, cutting, bending, placing in position and
binding of reinforcement bars and wastage, etc.

-------End of Section-7-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 72

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 73

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-8-STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS:

8.1. SCOPE:

8.1.1. This specification covers requirements for the supply wherever, fabrication and delivery of
structural steel and miscellaneous steel items for the work.

8.1.2. This specification also covers redesign wherever necessary, design of all connections and
published members, preparation of all shop fabrication drawings, inspection and painting of
structures by the fabricators.

8.2. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS:

8.2.1. Unless otherwise specified herein, the design, materials and workmanship shall conform to
the latest edition of the one or as many as applicable of the following standards or their
approved equivalents.

8.2.2. All standards, specifications and code of practices, referred to herein shall be the latest
edition including all applicable amendments, revisions and additional publications.

8.2.3. List of Indian Standards:

Sl.No. Code Description

Number
1. I.S.226 Structural steel (standard quality)
2. I.S.808 Rolled steel beams, channel and angles sections.
3. I.S.1099 Structural steel (ordinary quality)
4. ASTM 06 General requirements for delivery of rolled steel plates, sheet
piling and bars for structural use.
5. I.S.1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners.
6. I.S.3757 High tensile friction grip fasteners for structural engineering
purposes.
7. I.S.814 Specifications for covered electrodes for metal arc welding for
mild steel.
8. I.S.3613 Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged-arc
welding.
9. B.S.639 Covered electrodes for the manual metal arc welding of mild
steel and medium tensile steel
10. AWS.A-5.1 Specification for mild steel covered arc welding electrodes.
11. AWS.A-5-17 Specification for hard mild steel electrodes and submerged arc
welding.
12. I.S.1052 Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel
products.
13. I.S.2074 Ready mixed paint, red oxide zinc chrome, priming.
14. I.S.102 Ready mixed paint, brushing, red lead, non-setting, priming.
15. I.S.300 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building
construction.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 74

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

16. I.S.875 Code of practice for structural safety of building: Loading

standards.
17. I.S.1893 Recommendations for earthquake resistant design of structures.
18. B.S.449 The use of structural steel in building.
19. I.S.816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction.
20. I.S.4353 Recommendations for submerged arc welding of mild steel and
low alloy steel.
21. I.S.823 Code of procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild steel.
22. I.S.817 Codes of practice for training and welding of metal arc welders.
23. I.S.1182 Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion-
welded butt joints in steel plates
24. I.S.5334 Codes of practice for magnetic particle flaw detection of welds
25. ASTME. 94 Recommended practice for radiographic testing.
26. ASTME. 109 Dry powder magnetic particle inspection.
27. ASTME. 130 Wet magnetic particle inspection.
28. ASTME. 165 Liquid penetrant inspection.
29. I.S.1477 Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in building all allied
finishes.
30. I.S.1161 Steel Tubes for structural purposes
31. IS:1363 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of product (Part I to III)
32. I.S.1852 Rolling and Cutting Tolerances for Hot Rolled Steel Products
33. I.S.3502 Steel Chequered Plate
34. I.S.3757 High Strength Structural Bolts
35. I.S.1200 Method of Measurement

8.3. STEEL MATERIALS:

8.3.1. Structural steel shall be procured by the contractor conforming to relevant IS codes and
manufactured by M/s SAIL or TISCO or RINL only and shall be rolled from their own plants
and from virgin material. Materials manufactured by their authorized conversion agents
and re-rollers shall not be accepted. Documentary evidence of purchasing steel produced
from these manufacturers and their manufacturing test certificate shall be submitted. The
third party test shall be carried out as directed in line with the relevant Indian standards
and cost of which shall be included in the item rate and no separate payment shall be made
on account of this.

8.3.2. Contractor shall take proper care of the steel supplied by Client and protect the same from
weathering and damage. Any such materials rendered unserviceable or damaged while in
the contractor’s custody shall be replaced by contractor at his own cost as directed by the
Client/PMC.

8.3.3. Contractor’s stock material may be used provided the mill test reports identified with the
materials, satisfactorily demonstrate specified grade and quality. Also all such materials
supplied by contractor shall be in a sound condition of recent manufacture, in full length,

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 75

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

free from defects, loose mill scale, slag intrusions, laminations, pitting, flaky rust etc; and be
of full weight of thickness specified.
8.3.4. Unidentified steel material may be used only with prior permission from Client/PMC, in
writing, for short sections of minor importance or for small unimportant welds and
connections where in the opinion of the Client/PMC the quality of such material would not
adversely affect the strength and / or durability of the structure. Client/PMC may also
permit use of such material for other work if adequate and random samples taken out and
tested to demonstrate conformity with specification & requirement for work in view.

8.3.5. Contractor shall submit the fabrication drawing for the Client/PMC’s approval before
fabrication commences and make any modification therein as directed by the Client/PMC.
Approval by the Client/PMC of any of the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for correctness of engineering & design of connections, workmanship, fit of
parts, details, material, errors or omissions of any and all work shown thereon. The
Client/PMC’s approval shall constitute approval of the size of members, dimensions and
general arrangement but shall not constitute approval of the connections between
members and other details.

8.3.6. Approved design drawings will be furnished to the contractor and all drawings so furnished
shall form a part of this specification. Contractor shall consult these in detail for all the
information contained therein; which pertains to and is required for his work.

8.3.7. The Client/PMC reserve the right to make changes, revisions to drawings even after release
for preparation of shop drawings are very likely to be made to reflect additional data/details
received and more updated requirements.

8.3.8. Revisions in drawings and any new drawings made to include additional work by the
Client/PMC shall be considered a part of this specification and contract and the contractor
shall have no extra claims on this account.

8.3.9. Unless otherwise specified, the drawings and specifications are intended to include
everything obviously requisite and necessary for the proper and entire completion of the
work and job shall be carried out accordingly for the completeness as required.

8.3.10. Design drawings prepared by the Client/PMC will show all the dimensions and if necessary
clearance of structure, landings where necessary, size of each member, definite location of
openings at various levels and all other information necessary to enable the contractor in
prepare drawings for fabrication and erection.

8.3.11. It shall be clearly understood that the Client/PMC’s drawings are design drawing and are not
intended to show connection details, thickness of members, cuts, notches, bends and such
other details.

8.3.12. In the case of variation in drawings and specifications the decision of the Client/PMC shall be
final.

8.3.13. Should contractor in the execution of his work, find discrepancies in the information
furnished by the Client/PMC he shall refer such discrepancies to the Client/PMC before
proceeding with the work.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 76

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 77

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.4. FABRICATION:

8.4.1. All workmanship and finish shall be of the best quality and shall conform to the best-
approved method of fabrication.

8.4.2. All materials shall be finished straight and shall be machined true and square where so
specified. All holes and edges shall be free of burrs.

8.4.3. Shearing and chipping shall be neatly and accurately done and all portions of work exposed
to view shall be neatly finished.

8.4.4. Standard fabrication clearance as detailed in American Institute of steel construction

manuals shall generally be followed unless otherwise directed approved.

8.4.5. Material at the shops shall be kept clean and protected from weather.

8.4.6. Shop connections shall be effected by welding as specified on the Client/PMC’s design
drawings.

8.4.7. Rolled materials before being worked shall be straightened unless otherwise
required/specified.

8. 4.8. If straightening or flattening is necessary it shall be done by methods that will not injure the
material. Long plates shall be straightened by passing through a mangle or leveling rolls and
structural shapes by the use of mechanical or hydraulic bar straightening machines.

8.4.9. Heating or forging shall not be resorted to without the prior approval of the Client/PMC in
writing.

8.4.10. Cutting may be by shearing, cropping, sawing or machine flame cutting. All re-entrant
corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 12mm. Sheared or cropped edges
shall be dressed to a neat workmanlike finish and shall be free from distortion and burrs.

8.4.11. The korf on machine flame cut edges shall be removed. Where machine flame cutting is
permitted for high tensile steel, special care shall be taken to leave sufficient metal and all
flame hardened material shall be removed by machining/edge planning.

8.4.12. Hand flame cutting shall be undertaken only if so permitted by Client/PMC and only be
carried out by an expert in such work. Hand flame cut edges shall be ground smooth and
straight.

8.4.13. Edge planning of sheared, chopped or gas cut edges is not intended unless the sheared,
chopped or gas cut edges are such as to warrant it or specifically called for.

8.5. WELDING:

8.5.1. Welding procedure shall be submitted to Client/PMC for approval. Welding shall be
entrusted to only qualified and experienced welders who shall be periodically tested and
graded as per IS 817, IS: 7310 (Part 1) and IS: 7318 (Part-1).

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 78

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.5.2. Electrodes for structural welding works shall comply with the requirements of IS:226 and /
or BS:634 or AWS: A-5.1 and shall be of approved make.

8.5.3. The electrodes shall be suitable for use in the position and type of work as laid down in the
above specifications and as recommended by the manufacturer.

8.5.4. Electrodes of classification AWS E 60 XX and C 70 XX shall be used for welding steel
conforming to I.S.226 and I.S.2062 and of classification AWS E 70 XX for steel conforming to
I.S.961. Electrodes other than low-hydrogen electrodes shall not be permitted for thickness
of 32mm and above.

8.5.5. Joints in materials above 20mm thick and all the important connections shall be made with
low Hydrogen electrodes of AWS E 7016 or E 7010 classification.

8.5.6. The filler wire and flux combination for submerged arc welding shall conform to the
requirements for the desired application as laid down in I.S.3613. The weld metal deposited
by the submerged arc process shall have mechanical properties not less than that specified
for American Welding Society’s classification 5.17 E 60 for steel to I.S.226 and I.S.2042 and
AWS classification 5.17 E 70 for steel to IS: 961.

8.5.7. Electrode Flux covering shall be sound and unbroken. Broken or damaged coating shall cause
the electrodes to be discarded. Covered electrodes for manual-arc welding shall be properly
stored to an oven prior to use in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and only an
hour’s quota shall be issued to each welder from the oven.

8.5.8. Electrodes larger than 5mm diametre shall not be used for root-runs in butt welds.

8.5.9. Welding plants and accessories shall have capacity adequate for the welding procedure laid
down and shall satisfy appropriate standards and be of approved make and quality.
Contractor shall maintain all welding plants in good working conditions. All the electrical
plants in connection with the welding operation shall be properly and adequately earthen
and adequate means of measuring the current shall be provided.

8.5.10. All welds shall be made only by welders and welding operators who have been properly
trained and previously qualified by tests to perform the type of work required as prescribed
in the relevant applicable standards.

8.5.11. All welds shall be free from defects like blowholes, slag inclusions, lack of penetration, under
cutting, cracks etc. All welds shall be cleaned of slag or flux and show uniform sections,
smoothness of weld metal, featheredges without overlap and freedom from porosity.

8.5.12. Fusion faces and surfaces adjacent to the joint for a distance of at least 50mm on either side
shall be absolutely free from grease, paint, loose scales, moisture or any other substance
which might interfere with welding or adversely affect the quality of the weld.

8.5.13. Joint surfaces shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears, laminations etc.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 79

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.5.14. Preparation of fusion faces shall be done in accordance with the approved fabrication
drawings by shearing, chipping, achining or machine flame cutting except that shearing shall
not be used for thickness over 8mm.

8.5.15. In the fabrication of cover plated beams and built up members all shop splices in each
component part shall be made before such component part is welded to other parts of the
member. Wherever weld reinforcement interiors with proper fit-up between components to
be assembled for welding, these welds shall be ground flush prior to assembly.

8.5.16. The members to be joined by fillet welding shall be brought and held as close together as
possible and in no event shall be separated by more than 3mm. If the separation is 1.5mm
or greater the fillet weld size shall be increased by the amount of separation. This shall only
apply if the surfaces are completely sealed by welds. In all other cases the fit-up shall be
close enough to exclude water after painting.

8.5.17. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints and butt joints with backing plate shall
not exceed 1.5mm. A butting part to be butt-welded shall be carefully aligned and the
correct root gap maintained throughout the welding operation.

8.5.18. Misalignments greater than 25 percent of the thickness of the thinner plate or 3mm
whichever is smaller shall be corrected and in making the correction the parts shall not be
drawn into a shape sharper than 2 degrees (1 in 27.5).

8.5.19. Pre-qualified procedures recommended for appropriate welding standards and known to
provide satisfactory welds shall be followed. For non -standard procedures, qualification
testes are prescribed in IS: 823 shall be made to verify the adequacy of the procedures. A
welding procedure shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to the Client/PMC for
approval before the welding starts. This shall include all the details of welding procedures
with reference to the provisions of IS: 823 and IS: 4353. Approval of the welding procedure
by the Client/PMC shall not relieve the contractor from his responsibility for correct & sound
fabrication without distortion to the finished structure.

8.5.20. Submerged arc automatic or semi automatic welding shall generally be employed. Only
where it is not practicable to use submerged arc welding manual arc welding may be
resorted.

8.5.21. Voltage and current (and polarity if direct current is used) shall be set according to the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the electrode being used and suitability to
thickness of material, joint form etc.

8.5.22. The work shall be positioned for flat welding wherever practicable and overhead weld shall
be avoided.

8.5.23. No welding shall be done when the surface of the member is wet nor during periods of high
wind unless the welding operator and the work are properly protected.

8.5.24. In joints connected by fillet welds the minimum sizes of single run fillet welding or first runs
and minimum full sizes of fillet welds shall conform to the requirement of IS:816 and IS:823.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 80

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.5.25. All complete penetration butt welds made by manual arc welding except when produced
with the aid of backing material or welded in flat position from both sides in square-edge
material not over 8mm thick with root opening not less than one-half the thickness of the
thinner part joined shall have the root of the initial layer gouged and on the back side before
welding is started from that side and shall be so welded as to secure sound metal and
complete fusion throughout the entire core section.

8.5.26. Butt welds shall be terminated at the ends of joint in a manner that will ensure their
soundness. Where abutting parts are 20mm or more in thickness run-on and run-off plates
with similar edge preparation and having a width not less than the thickness of the thicker
part joined shall be used. These extension pieces shall be approved upon completion of the
weld and the ends of the weld made smooth and flush with the abutting parts. Where the
abutting parts are thinner than 20mm the extension pieces may be omitted but the ends of
the butt welds shall then be chipped or gouged out to sound metal and side welded to fill up
the ends to the required reinforcement.

8.5.27. Each layer of a multiple layer weld except root and surface runs may be moderately peened
with light blows from a blunt tool. Care shall be exercised to prevent scaling or flaking of
weld and base metal from overpeening.

8.5.28. No welding shall be done on base metal at a temperature below 5 oC. Base metal shall be
preheated as required to the temperature given in the table below prior to tack welding or
welding. When base metal not otherwise required to be preheated is at a temperature
below zero degree centigrade it shall be preheated to at least 20oC prior to tack welding or
welding. Preheating shall bring the surface of the base metal within 75mm of the point of
welding to the specified preheat temperature and this temperatures shall be maintained as
minimum inter pass temperature while welding is in progress.

8.5.29.

Min. Preheat & Inter pass Temp

Other than low Hydrogen Low Hydrogen welding
Thickness of thickest
welding electrodes electrodes
part at point of
Steel confirming to
welding
IS:226 IS:226
IS:961 IS:961
IS:2062 IS:2062
Upto 20mm None None None
20mm to 40mm 65 oC Welding with 10 oC 10 oC

40mm to 63mm 110 oC this process 95 oC 110 oC

not allowed
o
Over 63mm 150 C 110 oC 150 oC

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 81

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.5.30. Minimum pre-heat for I.S.226 steel in thickness up to 80mm shall be 10degree centigrade.

8.5.31. Electrodes other than low-hydrogen electrodes shall not be permitted for thickness of 75mm
and above.

8.5.32. Before commencing fabrication of a member or structure in which welding is likely to result
in distortion and or locked up stresses a complete programme of fabrication, assembly and
welding shall be made and submitted to the Client/PMC for approval. Such a programme
shall include, besides other appropriate details, full particulars in regard to the following:

8.5.32.1. Proposed preheating in components such as flanges and presetting of joints to offset
expected distortion.

8.5.32.2. Make up of sub-assemblies proposed to be welded before incorporation in final assembly.

8.5.32.3. Proposed joint forms, classification of wire and flux or covered electrodes, welding process
including fitting and welding sequence with directions in which freedom of movement is to
be allowed.

8.5.32.4. Proposed number, spacing and type of strong backs and details of jigs and fixtures for
maintaining proper fit-up and alignment during welding.

8.5.32.5. Any other special features like assembling similar members back to back or stress relief.

8.5.33. If so desired by the Client/PMC mock-up welding shall be carried out at contractor’s cost to
establish the efficiency of the proposed programme, with any modification suggested by the
Client/PMC in limiting distortion or/ and residual stress to acceptable levels.

8.5.34. All welds shall be inspected for flaws by any of the methods described under the clause of
‘Inspection’ given below in this specification. The choice of the method adopted shall be
determined by Client/PMC.

8.5.35. Contractor shall quote separately for carrying out such tests as called for in the schedule of
quantities. Contractor shall be paid only for tests, which establish soundness of welds. In
case the tests wherever defective work such tests will be at the contractor’s cost and
contractor shall correct such defects at his own cost and prove the soundness of rectified
work.

8.5.36. The correction of defective welds shall be carried out as directed by the Client/PMC without
damaging the parent metal. When a crack in weld is removed, magnetic particle inspection
or any other equally positive means as prescribed by the Client/PMC shall be used to inspect
that the whole of the crack and material up to 25mm beyond each end of the crack has
been removed. Cost of such test & operation incidental to correction shall be on
contractor’s account.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 82

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.6. TOLERANCES:

8. 6.1. The dimensional and weight tolerances for rolled shapes shall be in accordance with
I.S.1852 and / or ASTM-A

8.6.2. No rolled or fabricated member shall deviate from straightness by more than 1/1000th of
the length or 10mm whichever is smaller.

8.6.3. The length of members with both ends finished for contact shall have a tolerance of (±)
1mm.

8.6.4. Members without ends finished for contact bearing shall have a tolerance of (±) 1.5mm for
members up to 10 metres long and a tolerance of (±) 3mm for members over 10metres in
length.

8.6.5. Lateral deviation between center line of web plates and center line of flange plate at contact
surface in the case of built up sections shall not exceed 6mm.

8.6.6. The combined warpage and filet of flanges in welded built up sections shall not exceed
1/200th of the flange width or 3mm whichever is smaller.

8.6.7. The deviation from flatness of welded plate girder web in the length between stiffeners or a
length equal to the depth of the girder shall not exceed 1/150th of each length.

8.6.8. Deviations from the specified depth of welded girders measured at the center line of the
web shall not exceed (±) 3mm up to a depth of 1000mm, (±) 5mm for depths above
1000mm up to 2000mm and (+) 0mm and (-) 5mm for depths over 2000mm.

8.7. END MILLING:

8.7.1. Column ends bearing on each other or resting on based plates and compression joints
designed for bearing shall be milled true and square to ensure proper bearing and
alignment.

8.7.2. Base plates shall also have their surfaces milled true and square.

8.8. INSPECTION:

8.8.1. The Contractor shall give due notice to the Client/PMC in advance of the works getting ready
for inspection. All rejected material shall be promptly removed from the shop and replaced
with new material for the Client/PMC’s approval/ inspection. The fact that certain material
has been accepted at the Contractor’s shop shall not invalidate final rejection at site by the
Client/PMC; if it fails to conform to the requirements of these specifications, to be in proper
condition or has fabrication inaccuracies which prevents proper assembly nor shall it
invalidate any claim which the Client may make because of defective or unsatisfactory
materials and/or workmanship.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 83

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.8.2. No materials shall be painted or dispatched to site without inspection and approval by the
Client/PMCs unless such inspection is waived in writing by the Client/PMC.

8.8.3. Shop inspection by the Client/PMC or his authorized representative on submission of test
certificates and acceptance thereof by the Client/PMC shall not relieve contractor from the
responsibility of furnishing material conforming to the requirements of these specifications
nor shall it invalidate any claim which the Client/PMC may make because of defective or
unsatisfactory material and of workmanship.

8.8.4. Contractor shall provide all the testing and inspection services and facilities for shop work
except where otherwise specified. Contractor’s inspection work shall be under the control of
a competent Chief Inspector whose primary responsibility is inspection reporting to
management and not to production departments.

8.8.5. For fabrication work carried out in the field the same standard of supervision and quality
control shall be maintained as in shop fabricated work. The inspection and testing shall be
conducted in a manner satisfactory to the Client/PMC.

8.8.6. The inspection and tests on structural steel members shall be as set forth below:

8.8.7. If mill test reports are not available to any steel material the same shall be got tested by
contractor to the Client/PMC’s satisfaction to demonstrate conformly with the relevant
specification.

8.8.8. The under mentioned tests are not generally required for the work and if required will be
paid extra.

8.8.8.1. Magnetic Particle Test: Where root and intermediate passes of weld is examined by
magnetic particle testing such testing shall be carried out throughout. Its entire length in
accordance with ASTM specification E-109. In the case of completed welds such tests shall
be carried out in accordance with ASTM specification E-109 0r E-130 as decided by the
Client/PMC. If heat treatment is performed the completed weld shall be examined after the
heat treatment. All defects shall be replaced and retested. Magnetic particle tests shall be
carried out using alternating current. Direct current may be used with the permission of the
Client/PMC.

8.8.8.2. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: In the case of welds examined by liquid penetrant inspection
such tests shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM E-164 or I.S.3650. All defects shown
shall be repaired and rechecked.

8.8.8.3. Radiographic Inspection: All full strength butt welds shall be fully radiographed in
accordance with the recommended practice for radiographic testing as per ASTM E-94 and
Part U.W. 51 ASME Code Section VIII.

8.8.9. Dimension, Workmanship & Cleanliness:

The structural steel members shall be inspected at all stages of fabrication and assembly to
verify that dimensions, tolerances, alignment and surface finish, painting where specified

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 84

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

are in accordance with the requirements shown on contractor’s approved shop drawings
and Client/PMC’s drawings.

8.8.10. Inspection or Test failure:

8.8.10.1. In the event of any failure of structural steel members to meet an inspection or test
requirement, contractor shall notify Client/PMC or his authorized representative. Contractor
must obtain permission from Client/PMC before repair is undertaken.

8.8.10.2 The quality control procedures to be followed to ensure satisfactory repair shall be subject
to approval by Client/PMC.

8.8.10.3. Client/PMC has a right to specify additional inspection or testing, as he deems necessary and
the additional cost of such testing will be borne by the Client.

8.8.10.4. Contractor shall maintain records of all inspection and testing which shall be made available
to Client/PMC or his authorized representative.

8.8.11. Some steel work particularly columns along with the tie beams/bracings may have to be
shop assembled to ensure satisfactory fabrication, obtaining of adequate bearing areas etc.;
if so desired by Client/PMC at no extra cost to purchaser.

8.9. DRILLING HOLES FOR OTHER WORKS:

Holes in members required for installing equipment or steel furnished by other

manufacturers or other contractors shall be drilled in contractor’s shop as part of this
contract. The information for which will be supplied by Client/PMC before fabrication of the
steel.

8.10. HANDLING AND STORAGE:

8.10.1. No dragging of steel shall be permitted. All steel shall be stored 300mm above ground on
suitable packing to avoid damage in the order required for erection and with erection marks
visible. All storage areas shall be prepared and maintained by contractor.

8.10.2. Steel shall not be stored in the vicinity of area where the excavation or grading will be done
and if stored temporarily, this shall be removed by contractor well before such excavation
and /or grading commences in a safe distance to avoid burial under debris.

8.10.3. Scratched or abraded steel shall be given a coat of the primer specified on drawings for
protection after unloading and handling prior to erection. All milled and machined surfaces
shall be properly protected from rust/corrosion by suitable coating and also from getting
damaged.

8.10.4. After checking and inspection, all members shall be marked for identification during
erection. This mark shall correspond to distinguishing marks on approved erection drawings
and shall be legibly painted and stamped on it. The erection mark shall be stamped with a

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 85

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

metal dye with figures at least 20mm high and to such optimum depth as to be clearly
visible.

8.10.5. Structural steel frames shall be erected plumb and true. All steel columns and beams shall
be checked for plumb and level individually before and after connections are made.
Temporary bracings may be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to
which the structure may be subjected including erection equipment and the operation
thereof. Such bracings shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety and
stability.

8.11. INSPECTION AT SITE:

8.11.1. Client/PMC or their authorized representatives shall have free access to all parts of the job
during erection and all erection shall be subject to their approval. In case of faulty erection
all such dismantling and re -erection required will be at contractor’s cost. No paint shall be
applied to field welds until these have been approved by Client/PMC.

8.12. PAINTING:

8.12.1. All fabricated steel material except those galvanized shall receive protective paint coating as
specified on design drawings.

8.12.2. The surface of steel work to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, rust,
grease, dirt and other foreign matter by hand tool cleaning, power tool cleaning, flame
cleaning or sand/ shot blasting as indicated on drawings. In power brushing sufficient care

shall be taken not to burnish mill scale to a slick finish to which paint may not adhere
properly.

8.12.3. The paint treatment as specified on drawings shall be applied either by brushing or spraying
on the thoroughly cleaned and dry surface. Airless spraying shall be done if so specified.

8.12.4. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall receive and additional coat of the specified paint
prior to assembly.

8.12.5. Paint shall be stirred frequently to keep the pigment in suspension. All paint delivered to the
fabrication shop shall be ready mixed in original sealed containers as packed by the paint
manufacturers and no thinners shall be permitted. No painting shall be done in frosty /
foggy weather or when the humidity is high enough to cause condensation of the surface to
be painted. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be painted is
5 degree centigrade or lower.

8.13. MODE OF MEASUREMENTS:

8.13.1. For the purpose of payment the weight of the actual completed structures shall be
calculated from the approved drawings for different items of work.

8.13.2. The allowances will be permitted for galvanizing, welding or for cutting margins. One Tonne
for the purpose of payment shall mean One Metric Tonne.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 86

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

8.13.3. The weight of member made out of standard rolled section such as beam, channels, angles,
etc. shall be based on the standard IS: 800. The weight of member shall be considered
without deducting for holes, notches, bevels cuts etc. Where a component consists of a cut
joist or channels, the full weight of the rolled section shall be considered only if more than
half the depth of the original section is used. Otherwise, only half the section unit weight
shall be considered for calculation of the weight of plates for skew cuts and notches of
900square centimetres or larger.

8.13.4. The weight of any built-up member shall be separated into weight of each component.

-------End of Section-8-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 87

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-9-BRICK, STONE, CC AND ACC BLOCK MASONRY WORKS:

9.1. SCOPE:

9.1.1. This specification covers the general requirements for brick masonry, stone masonry and
concrete hollow / solid block masonry and allied works.

9.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

9.2.1. The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, equipment, scaffolding,
materials, etc. required for complete execution of the work in accordance with the drawings
and as described herein and/or as directed by the Owner/PMC.

9.2.2. All workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest standards and best possible practice.
Masonry work shall be true to line & level as shown on drawings. All such masonry shall be
tightly built against structural members and bonded with dowels, anchors, inserts, etc, as
shown on the drawings.

9.2.3. The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in the
Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the Safety Rules as specified in the
General Conditions of the Contract for ensuring safety of men and materials.

9.2.4. Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the Owner/PMC
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation regarding adequacy,
correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality, workmanship, etc.

9.3. CODES AND STANDARDS:

9.3.1. All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the latest editions
including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of all these
documents shall generally be available at site, with the Contractor.

9.3.2. List of certain important Indian Standards, Acts and Codes applicable to this work is given
below. However, the applicable standards and codes shall be as per but not limited to the list
given below:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 88

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Code
Sl.No. Description
Number
1. IS:269 33Grade ordinary Portland cement
2. IS:383 Coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete
3. IS:455 Portland slag cement
4. IS:456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
5. IS:712 Building lines
6. IS:1077 Common burnt clay building bricks
7. IS:1124 Method of test for determination of water absorption apparent
specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones
8. IS:1127 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural
building stones for masonry work
9. IS:1489 Portland Pozzolana cement
10. IS:1597 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry
11. IS:1905 Code of practice for structural use of un-reinforced masonry.
12. IS:2116 Sand for masonry mortars
13. IS:2185 Concrete masonry units - hollow and solid concrete blocks
14. IS:2212 Code of practice for brickwork
15. IS:2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars
16. IS:2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete
17. IS:2572 Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete block
masonry
18. IS:2691 Burnt clay facing bricks
19. IS:3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings
20. IS:3696 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders
21. IS:4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and
construction of buildings
22. IS:8112 43Grade ordinary Portland cement
23. IS:12894 Fly ash lime bricks
24. SP:20 Handbook on masonry design and construction

9.4. MATERIALS:

9.4.1. Bricks:

Burnt clay bricks, for general masonry work, shall conform to IS:1077 and for face brick
work, shall conform to IS:2691. Fly ash lime bricks shall conform to IS:12894.

First class quality chamber burnt bricks of nominal size 8-3/4”x4-1/2”x2-3/4” shall be used
for general masonry work. Table moulded bricks should be used if manufactured locally.

Bricks for general masonry work shall be sound, hard, well burnt (but not over burnt)
without being vitrified, of uniform size, shape, having sharp edges, cherry red colour and
homogenous in texture. These shall be free from cracks, flaws or nodules of free lime and
shall emit clear ringing sound (metallic sound) when struck. These shall not show any signs

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 89

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

of efflorescence either when dry or subsequent to soaking in water. Fractured surface shall
show uniform texture free from grits, lumps, holes etc.

Unless otherwise specified, minimum compressive strength shall correspond to class

designation50 as per IS:1077 with a minimum crushing strength of 50kg/sq.cm for general
masonry work. Water absorption after 24hours immersion shall not exceed 20% by weight
for common bricks and 15% for face bricks.

Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground in regular tiers even as they are unloaded to
minimize breakage and defacement of bricks. Bricks of different class, selected for various
categories of use in the work, shall be stacked separately. Each stack shall contain equal
number of bricks, preferably not more than 3000.

Representative samples of bricks shall be submitted to the Owner/PMC for approval before
supply to site and the approved samples shall remain with the Owner/PMC. All bricks
proposed to be used shall conform to the approved samples in all respects.

Bricks picked up at random from the stacks shall be tested as to ascertain to satisfy the
acceptability requirements as and when desired by the Owner/PMC at the Contractor’s cost.

9.4.2. Stones:

The stone shall be of the type specified, such as granite, sand stone, quartzite and /or best
locally available stone which shall be subject to approval of the Owner/PMC. All stones shall
be from approved quarries. These shall be hard, tough, durable, compact grained, uniform
the texture and colour and free from decay, flaws, veins, cracks and sand holes. The surface
of a freshly broken stone shall be bright, clean and sharp and shall show uniformity of
texture, without loose grains and free from any dull, chalky or earthy appearance. Stone with
round surface shall not be used.

Stones showing mottled colours shall not be used for face work. A stone shall not absorb
more than 5% of its weight of water after 24hours immersion. The type of stone shall be as
specified or shown on drawings and/or as instructed by the Owner/PMC. Stones used for
masonry work shall conform to IS:1597 (part-I) No soft stone shall be used for masonry or for
filling purpose. The minimum crushing strength of stone shall be 200kg/sqcm unless
otherwise specified.

Normally, stones used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. the length of
stone, shall not exceed three times the height and the breadth on base shall not be greater
than three fourth of the thickness of wall not less than 15cm. The height of stone may be
upto 30cm.

Any stone not found upto the satisfaction of Owner/PMC shall be removed immediately
from site by the Contractor.

Dressed stone for all facing, paving etc. shall be stored with special care to avoid defacement
of faces and edges or damp and rust stains.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 90

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

9.4.3. Hollow / Solid Concrete Blocks:

9.4.3.1. Manufacture:

9.4.3.1.1. Mix: The Concrete mix used for blocks shall not be richer than one part by volume of cement
to 6 parts of combined fine and coarse aggregate unless otherwise specified; the concrete
shall be of CC 1:2:4 by using 12mm and down size aggregate.

9.4.3.1.2. Mixing: The concrete shall normally be mixed in a mechanical mixer. Mixing shall be
continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials, and the mass is uniform in
colour and consistency.

9.4.3.1.3. Placing and Compaction: The mould shall be filled upto a height of above the mould
appropriate to the machine used, vibrated or mechanically tamped and struck off level.
Immediately the block is made, it shall be released from the mould and removed with the
pallet to a covered shed, to protect it against sun and strong winds. The blocks shall be
stored in the shed until they are sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage
but in no case shall this period be less than 12hours.

9.4.3.1.4. Curing: The blocks hardened as above shall then removed from the pallets and placed in a
curing water tank or taken to the curing yard, where these shall be kept continuously moist
for atleast 21 days. When the blocks are cured in an immersion tank, the water of the tank
shall be changed atleast every 4days. The curing yard is a paved yard, which is provided with
water fountains in the centre. The blocks are stacked on the platform around the fountains,
which work continuously. The foundation tanks are connected to elevated water, storage
tank, if directed by the Client/PMC. Steam curing of blocks may be adopted instead of
normal curing by pressure or no pressure steam curing as directed by the Client/PMC’s, for
non pressure steam curing, the blocks shall be subjected to the action of thoroughly
saturated steam at a temperature of 38 to 54C for a period of not less than 24hours or when
necessary, for such additional time as may be necessary to meet the physical requirements.

9.4.3.1.5. Drying: After curing the blocks shall be dried under shade for a period of 4 weeks before
being used on the work. They shall be stacked with voids horizontal to facilitate through
passage of air. The blocks shall be allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before they are
laid in a wall.

9.4.3.1.6. Surface Texture and Finish: Concrete masonry units shall be given surface textures ranging
from a very fine close texture to a course open texture by proper selection, grading and
proportioning of the aggregate at the time of manufacture and as directed by the
Client/PMC. The colour may be introduced by incorporating non-bleeding mineral pigments
in the facing concrete, or by applying a coloured Portland cement grout or paint to the face
of the units soon after they are removed from the moulds, all as directed by the Clients/PMC.

9.4.3.2. Physical Requirements:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 91

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects, which interfere with the proper
placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction. The minimum
compressive strength, being the average of eight units, and the minimum compressive
strength of individual units, when tested in the manner described shall be as prescribed
below:

Minimum average Minimum strength

Density of block
Type Grade compressive strength of individual units
(kg/cum)
of units (N/mm2) (N/mm2)
A (3.5) 3.5 2.8
A( 4.5) 4.5 3.6
Hollow (Open Not less than 1500
and A (5.5) 5.5 4.4
close
d cavity) A (7.0) 7.0 5.6
load bearing unit B (2.0) 2.0 1.6
Less than 1500 but
B (3.0) 3.0 2.4
not less than 1000
B (5.0) 5.0 4.0
Hollow (open and Less than
close
d cavity) 1500
C (1.5) 1.5 1.2
non-load bearing but not less
units than 1000
Solid (load D (5.0) 5.0 4.0
Not less than 1800
bearing units) D (4.0) 4.0 3.2

9.4.3.3. Drying Shrinkage:

The drying shrinkage of the units when unrestrained being the average of three units, shall
be determined in the manner described in method of test for the determination of drying
shrinkage shall confirm to IS:2185- latest issue.
Load-bearing lightweight concrete masonry units, hollow (open are closed cavity) or solid.
Grade A: 0.08percent, max; and
Grade B: 0.09 percent, max
Non-Load bearing lightweight -0.09 percent, max concrete masonry units

9.4.3.4. Test Procedure:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 92

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The blocks required for carrying out the tests laid down in this standard shall be taken by one
of the methods as given below:

9.4.3.4.1. Sampling Blocks in Motion:

Whenever practicable, samples of blocks shall be taken when the blocks are being moved as
in the case of loading, unloading, etc. The batch from where samples are to be drawn shall
be divided into a number of convenient portions such that when one sample is drawn from
each of these portions the minimum number of blocks specified under 10.1 is provided.

9.4.3.4.2. Sampling Blocks from a Stack:

The number of blocks required for the test shall be taken at random from across the top of
the stacks, the sides accessible, and from the interior of the stacks by opening trenches from
the top. In either case, a sample of 20 blocks shall be taken from every consignment of 5,000
blocks or part thereof of the same size and same batch of manufacture. From these samples,
the blocks shall be taken at random for conducting the tests.

9.4.3.4.3. Number of Tests:

All the 20blocks shall be checked for dimensions and inspected for visual defects.

Out of the 20 blocks, 3 blocks shall be subjected to the test for blocks density, 8 blocks to the
test for compressive strength, 3 blocks to the test for water absorption and 3 blocks to the
test for drying shrinkage and later to the test for moisture movement. The remaining 3
blocks shall be reserved for retest for drying shrinkage and moisture movement if a need
arises. The above tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS:2185 (Part – II) latest issue
and no extra payment will be paid for conducting the above tests.

9.4.4. Cement:

The cement used shall be the Ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269 and IS:8112.
Unless otherwise specified ordinary Portland cement of 43Grade conforming to latest
IS:8112 shall be used for all masonry and concrete works. Testing of cement may be carried
out in Employer’s authorized laboratory if so desired by the Owner/PMC. The Contractor
shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate quantity of cement. Cement
shall be stored in closed weather proof sheds with raised wooden plank flooring to prevent
deterioration by damages or intrusion of foreign matter away from walls.

9.4.5. Sand:

Sand shall conform to IS:383 and IS:2116. Sand shall have fineness modulus between 2.1 and
2.5. Sand shall be hard, durable, clear and free from dirt clay organic method or other
impurities. Silt content of sand shall not exceed 5% by volume. Sand containing any trace of
salt shall be rejected.

9.4.6. Water:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 93

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Water used for mortar and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of
deleterious matter such as oils, acids, alkalis, sugar, organic materials etc. Laboratory tests to
be conducted at Employer’s approved laboratory to ascertain construction suitability of
water. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing masonry.

9.4.7. Lime:

Lime shall be stone lime and it shall conform to IS:712. Hydrated lime shall be mixed with
water to form putty. This shall be stored with reasonable care to prevent evaporation of
water for atleast 24 hours before use. Quick lime shall be slaked with enough water to make
a cream and then stored with reasonable care to prevent evaporation of water for atleast
seven days before use.

9.5. Scaffolding:

Unless otherwise instructed by the Owner/PMC, double scaffolding having two sets of
vertical supports shall be provided for all building work. The supports shall be sound, strong
and tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. The
contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining sufficiently strong scaffolding
so as to with stand all loads likely to come upon it.

9.6. Mortar:

9.6.1. IS:2250 shall be followed as general guidance for preparation and use of mortar. Mixing of
mortar shall be done in a mechanical mixer. Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in specified
proportions thoroughly and then water shall be added gradually. Wet mixing shall be
continued till mortar of the consistency of a stiff paste and uniform colour is obtained. Only
the quantity of mortar which can be used within thirty minutes of its mixing shall be
prepared at a time. Hand mixing may be allowed by the Owner/PMC on clean approved
platform in special cases only.

9.6.2. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to set and in
any case within thirty minutes after the water is added to the dry mixture. Mortar left
unused for more than thirty minutes after mixing shall be rejected and removed from the
site of work.

9.6.3. Surplus mortar droppings while laying masonry, if received on a surface free from dirt, may
be mixed with fresh mortar if permitted by the Owner/PMC, where directed for addition of
extra cement and this shall be implemented.

9.7. Brick Masonry:

9.7.1 Only cement-sand mortar shall be used. Lime shall be added for composite mortar with
specific approval of the Client/PMC. Unless otherwise specified, mortar for brickwork having
one or more brick thickness shall be 1 part cement and 6 parts sand by volume as specified.
Mortar for half -brick thick walls shall be 1 part cement and 4 parts sand by volume. Richer
mix proportion shall be used, whenever specified or as per design requirement. Mortar shall
meet the compressive strength requirement as per IS:2250 and IS:1905.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 94

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

9.7.2. Brick masonry construction:

9.7.2.1. IS:2212 shall be followed as general guidance for construction of brick masonry. Bricks shall
be soaked in water before use for a period generally not less than 6 hours so that the water
just penetrates the whole depth of the bricks.

9.7.2.2. Bricks shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. Half or cut bricks shall not be
used except where necessary to complete the bond. Closer in such cases shall be cut to the
required size and used near the ends of the walls, next to quoin headers.

9.7.2.3. Bricks shall be laid generally with frogs upwards. A layer of mortar shall be spread on the full
width and over a suitable length of the lower course. Each brick shall be properly bedded and
set home (in position) by gently tapping with the trowel handle or with a wooden mallet. Its
inside face shall be buttered with mortar before the next brick is laid and pressed against it.
On completion of a course, all vertical joints shall be fully filled from the top with mortar. The
thickness of joints shall be kept uniform and shall not exceed 10mm. Bricks shall be so laid
that all joints are full of mortar.

9.7.2.4. All face joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 15mm by raking tools during the
progress of brickwork, when the mortar is still green, so as to provide proper key for the
plaster or pointing to be done. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the
joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying.

9.7.2.5. Brickwork in walls shall be taken up truly plumb. All courses shall normally be laid truly
horizontal unless indicated to be laid on slope and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical.
Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come directly one over the other. Brick wall shall be
construed with atleast one plain face with proper alignment.

9.7.2.6. All connected brickwork shall be carried up simultaneously and no portion of work shall be
left more than one metre below the rest of the work. Where this is not possible, in the
opinion of the Owner/PMC, the work shall be raked back according to bond (and not
toothed) at an angle not steeper than 45deg. The work done per day should not be more
than one metre height.

9.7.2.7. All iron fixtures, pipes, water outlets, hold fasts for doors and windows, etc. which are
required to be built into the brickwork shall be embedded in their correct position in mortar
or cement concrete as the work proceeds as per directions of the Client/PMC.

9.7.2.8. All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural parts and
around door and window frames with proper distance to permit caulked joint. Where
drawings indicate that structural steel columns and spandrel beams are to be partly or
wholly covered with brickwork, the bricks shall be laid closely against all flanges and webs
with all spaces between the steel and brickwork filled solid with mortar not less than 10mm
in thickness.

9.7.2.9. The top courses of all plinth, parapet, steps and top wall shall be laid with brick on edge
unless otherwise specified. Care shall be taken that the bricks forming the top courses and
ends of walls are properly radiated and keyed into position as shown on the drawings.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 95

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

9.7.2.10. Scaffolding shall be strong enough to withstand all the dead, live and impact loads which are
likely to come upon it. It shall also be so designed as to ensure the safety of the workmen
using them.

9.7.2.11. In case of joining old brickwork with new brickwork, the old work shall be toothed to the full
width of the new wall and to the depth of quarter of a brick in alternate courses. It shall be
cleaned of all dust, loose mortar, etc., and thoroughly wetted before starting new brick work.
Thickness of each course of new work shall be made equal to the thickness of the
corresponding course of the old work by adjusting thickness of horizontal mortar joints.

9.7.2.12. The face of the brickwork shall be cleaned on the same day on which brickwork is laid and all
mortar dropping removed promptly.

9.7.2.13. Template (bed-block) of plain or reinforced cement concrete shall generally be provided to
support ends of RCC beams. Top surface of the wall shall be suitably treated as per direction
of the Owner/PMC so as to minimize the friction to movement of the concrete slab over the
bearing.

9.7.2.14. Brickwork shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when the mortar is green.
Masonry work shall be cured by keeping it constantly moist on all faces for a minimum
period of seven days. Brickwork carried out during the day shall be suitably marked
indicating the date on which the work is done so as to keep a watch on the curing period.

9.7.3 Half brick masonry:

The work shall be done in the same manner, as mentioned in 9.7.2 except that all courses
shall be laid with stretchers. Unless otherwise specified the walls will be provided with RCC
(1:2:4) binders reinforced with 2nos. of 8mm mild steel bars and 6mm MS tie bars at 230mm
intervals. The cost of half brick work shall include the cost of reinforcement and form work
for binders. RCC band shall be of size 115mm widex80mm high and shall be continuous,
unless where broken by openings in walls.

9.7.4. Exposed brickwork:

Exposed brickwork i.e. brickwork is superstructure which is not covered by plaster shall be as
shown on the drawings and shall be done by specially skilled masons. All courses shall be laid
truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in alternate courses
shall come directly one over the other. Thickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform and
for this purpose wooden straight edge with graduations indicating thickness of each course
including joint shall be used. The height of window sills, bottom of lintels and other such
important points in the height of the wall shall be marked on the graduated straight edge.
Masons must check workmanship frequently with plumb, spirit level, rule and string.

For all exposed brick work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be
provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over
which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 96

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

If face bricks are specified on the drawings, the brickwork shall be in composite work with
face bricks on the exposed face and balance in standard bricks, but maintaining the bond
fully. Where face bricks are not specified, bricks for the exposed face shall be specially
selected from available stack of bricks. All exposed brickwork on completion of work shall be
rubbed down, washed clean and pointed as specified. Where face bricks are used,
carborandum stone shall be used for rubbing down.

9.7.5. Reinforcing Anchorage:

For external walls, the anchorage in the form of flats or rods from spandrel beams and
columns and any other anchoring and reinforcement as shown on the drawing shall be
adequately embedded in the masonry.

9.8. HOLLOW / SOLID BLOCK MASONRY:

9.8.1 Block masonry construction:

9.8.1.1. All Hollow / Solid block (M-15) masonry work should be carried out as shown on the
drawings with set blocks, projections. Cuttings, tooting etc., wherever the projection of
cement mortar for pointing in the proportion of 1:5 shall be used. Mortar shall consist of
cement and clean, sharp coarse sand. The mortar mixed with high sulphate resistance
cement shall be used upto ground floor level and above Portland cement shall be used
confirming to IS 269-Latest issue.

9.8.1.2. Sand shall be clean, not too fine, not to coarse and shall fall with in the grading bones I to IV
given in Table – III of IS:383 – latest issue. The silt content of sand shall not exceed 5% by
volume.

9.8.1.3. Water used for mixing mortar shall be in accordance with Clause 4.3 of IS:456- Latest issue.

9.8.1.4. Unless otherwise specified, the size of blocks shall be 400mm length, 200mm width and
100mm depth for main walls and 400mm length, 100mm width and 100mm depth of
partition walls. Half-length blocks shall be of 200mm length and it shall be used for obtaining
the bond and where absolutely necessary as directed by the Client/PMC. Variation in size of
block upto + 1mm is acceptable.

9.8.1.5. The blocks shall be bedded and jointed with mortar in such a manner as not to leave voids.
Each block shall be correctly bedded into position by topping with the handle of the trowel,
grouting of mortar slurry will not be allowed except where necessary for special reasons and
in such cases, prior permission of the Client/PMC shall be obtained.

9.8.1.6. Care shall be taken that each coarse of block masonry work is truly horizontal and perfect in
bond and the face of the wall is straight, plumb and even. The mortar joints shall be 12mm
thickness, except where extra thickness is required for the purpose of bringing the block to
the required height or level.
9.8.1.7. All junctions of main walls, partition walls and cross walls shall be carefully bonded into the
main walls. The rate of laying masonry will be upto a height of 100cm per day if cement
mortar is used. Greater heights may be built only if permitted by the Clients /PMC.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 97

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

9.8.1.8. During rains, the work shall be carefully covered to prevent mortar from being washed away,
should any mortar or cement be washed away, the work shall be removed and rebuilt at the
contractor’s expense.

9.9. AERATED AUTO CLAVE BLOCKS (AAC BLOCKS)

9.9.1. All the requirements & specification for AAC blocks shall be as per manufacturer guide lines.

9.9.2. AAC blocks to any size shall conform to IS:2185 or equivalent BS.

9.9.2.1. Size of Block:

600x200mm 150mm thick

600x200mm 200mm thick
600x200mm 230mm thick

9.9.2.2. Dimension tolerance:

Length Not more than (+) or (-) 3mm

Height, Width Not more than (+) or (-) 3mm

9.9.2.3. Weight of a block in Kg:

600x200x150mm thick Not less than 10.5 Kgs.

600x200x200mm thick Not less than 14.0 Kgs.
600x200x230mm thick Not less than 16.1 Kgs.

9.9.2.4. Yard dry density - Not less than 550 -600 Kg/Cum.

9.9.2.5. Compressive Strength-not less than 3.0N/Sq.mm conforming to BOQ Specification.

9.9.2.6. Thermal conductivity – 0.16 W/m-k

9.9.2.7. Estimated sound 37 to 42 Db.

9.10. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

9.10.1. The method of measurement for various items in the tender shall be generally in
accordance with the IS:1200 and as per relevant specification and as directed by the
Client/PMC.

9.10.2. Except where otherwise described, stone work and stone walling generally shall be given in
cubic metres and fascia work in square metres.

9.10.3. When measuring walls, the thickness shall be measured to the nearest one centimeter.

9.10.4. Deductions shall be made as described in IS:1200.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 98

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

------- End of Section-9-------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 99

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-10-PLASTERING AND PAINTING WORKS:

10.1. SPECIFICATION FOR PLASTERING WORKS:

10.1.1 SCOPE

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 100

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

This specification covers the general requirements for plastering and allied works on all types
of masonry and concrete surfaces and pointing works.

10.1.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

10.1.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, equipment, scaffolding,
materials, etc. required for complete execution of the work in accordance with the drawings
and as described herein and/or as directed by the Client/PMC.

10.1.2.2. The specifications given in IS:1661 shall be followed as a general guidance for plastering work.
All plaster work and other wall finishes shall be executed by skilled workmen and shall be of
the best workmanship and in strict accordance with the dimensions shown on the drawings
subject to the approval of the Client/PMC.

10.1.2.3. The primary requirement of plaster work shall be to provide absolutely water tight enclosure,
dense, smooth and hard and devoid of any cracks on the interior and/or exterior. The
contractor shall do all that is necessary to ensure that this objective is achieved. All plastering
shall be finished to true plane, without any imperfections and shall be square with adjoining
work and form proper foundation for finishing materials such as paint etc.

10.1.2.4. Masonry and concrete surfaces which call for applications of plaster shall be clean, free from
efflorescence, damp and sufficiently rough and keyed to ensure proper bond, subject to the
approval of the Client/PMC.

10.1.2.5. Wherever directed by the Client/PMC, all joints between concrete frames and masonry in
filling shall be expressed by a groove cut in the plaster. The said groove shall coincide with the
joints beneath as directed. Where grooves are not called for, the joints between concrete
members and masonry in filling shall be covered by 24gauge galvanised chicken mesh strips
400mm wide or as called for on drawings / documents which shall be in position before
plastering.

10.1.2.6. The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in the
Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the Safety Rules as specified in the General
Conditions of the Contract for ensuring safety of men and materials.

10.1.2.7 Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review etc. whatsoever by the Client/PMC
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation regarding adequacy,
correctness, completeness, safety, strength, workmanship etc.

10.1.3. CODES AND STANDARDS

10.1.3.1. All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the latest editions
including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of all these
documents shall generally be available at site with the Contractor.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 101

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

10.1.3.2 List of certain important Indian Standards, Acts and Codes applicable to this work is given
below. However, the applicable standards and codes shall be as per but not limited to the list
given below:

Code
Sl.No. Description
Number
1. IS:383 Specification for coarse & fine aggregate from natural source or
concentrate.
2. IS:1542 Sand for plaster
3. IS:1661 Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime
plaster finishes.
4. IS:1635 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and
preparation of putty.
5. IS:2547 Gypsum building plaster.
6. IS:269 Specification for ordinary, rapid hardening and low heat
Portland cement.
7. IS:712 Building limes
8. IS:455 Portland slag cement

10.1.4. MATERIALS

10.1.4.1. Cement

The cement used shall be Ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269 or IS:8112. Unless
otherwise specified Ordinary Portland cement of 43grade conforming to latest IS:8112 shall
be used for all plastering works.

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate quantity of
cement.

Cement shall be a stored in closed weather proof shed on raised wooden plank flooring away
from wall to prevent deterioration by dampness or intrusion of foreign matter etc.

10.1.4.2. Sand

Sand shall conform to IS:1542, IS:383 and IS:2116. It shall be from a natural source or crushed
stone sand. The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and
organic matter, and shall not contain any appreciable amount of clay balls or pellets. The sand
shall not contain any harmful impurities. The sand shall be properly graded and of medium
size with a fineness modules of 2.0 to 2.2. Sand containing any trace of salt shall be rejected.
Sand shall be washed if required by the Client/PMC.

10.1.4.3. Coarse aggregate shall conform to IS: 383. Coarse aggregate of size 6 to 12mm shall be used
for rough cast plaster in finishing coat.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 102

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

10.1.4.4. Water

Water used for mortar and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils,
acids, alkalis, sugar, organic materials etc. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory
for mixing mortar and curing.

10.1.4.5. Lime

Lime shall be stone lime and it shall conform to IS:712. Hydrated lime shall be mixed with
water to form a putty. This shall be stored with reasonable care to prevent evaporation of
water for atleast 24 hours before use. Quick lime shall be slaked with enough water to make a
cream and then stored with reasonable care to prevent evaporation of water for atleast
seven days before use.

10.1.4.6. Water Proofing Compound

CICO No.1 or equivalent approved quality from Fosroc/Basf/Pidilite shall be used.

10.1.5. MORTAR

10.1.5.1. Unless otherwise specified cement-sand mortar shall be used. Cement mortar shall be of
proportion specified for each type of work. Cement mortar shall be prepared by mixing
cement and sand in specified proportions by volume. Sand shall be measured on the basis of
its dry volume using gauge boxes. Suitable allowance in quantity shall be made to cater for
the bulkage. Cement shall preferably be measured by weight. For the purpose of determining
the corresponding volume, one cubic metre of cement shall be taken to weigh 1440Kgs.

10.1.5.2. Cement mortar mix is specified as 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5 etc. The first figure will mean one part of
Portland cement by volume, the second figure will mean so many parts of sand by volume.
For example, cement mortar 1:4 would mean one part of cement and four parts of sand.

10.1.5.3. The mixing of mortars shall be done in mechanical mixer. However, depending on nature,
magnitude and location of the work, the Client/PMC may relax the condition of use of
mechanical mixer and allow hand mixing.

Cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be fed into the mixer and mixed dry
thoroughly in the mixer. Water shall then be added gradually and the wet mixing continued
for atleast 3minutes. If hand mixing is allowed it shall be carried out on a clean, water tight
platform. The accurately gauged materials shall be put on platform, and thoroughly mixed
dry. Water shall then be added and the whole mixed thoroughly until the mix is
homogeneous and of uniform colour. Only that quantity of mortar, which can be used within
30minutes of its mixing shall generally be prepared at a time. Care shall be taken, not to add
more water than required. IS:2250 and IS:1661 shall be referred for ascertaining the quantity
of water.

Cement mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it begins to set,
preferably within half an hour from the time water is added to cement during mixing. Any

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 103

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

mortar for plaster partially set shall be rejected and removed from the site. Sweep mortar
shall not be used.

10.1.6. SAMPLES

Samples of each type of plaster and other wall finish shall be prepared well in advance of
undertaking the work for approval by the Client/PMC.

10.1.7. CHASINGS AND CUTTINGS

All chasings, installations of conduits, inserts, boxes, etc. shall be completed and finished with
cement mortar with galvanised chicken mesh before any plastering or other wall finish is
commenced on a surface. No chasing or cutting of plaster or other finish on a surface shall be
permitted. Broken corners shall be cut back not less than 150mm on both sides and patched
with plaster of Paris (POP) as directed.

10.1.8. PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The surface shall be cleaned of all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, efflorescence
and other foreign matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surfaces shall be roughened by
wire brushing, if it is not hard and by heckling when it is hard. In case of concrete surface, if a
chemical retarder has been applied to the framework, the surface shall be roughened by wire
brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be taken that
none of the retarders is left on the surface.

Galvanised chicken mesh (24 gauge, 12mm size) shall be provided at junctions of brick
masonry and concrete members, to be plastered and other locations 150mm on either sides
of the junction in double fold or as called for, properly stretched and nailed, ensuring equal
thickness of plaster on both sides of the mesh. The rate includes in the plaster works.

Trimming of projections, wherever necessary shall be done to achieve an even surface. The
joints in all walls shall be raked out to a depth of at least 10mm, brush cleaned with wire
brushes, dusted and thoroughly wetted before plastering work.

For ceiling plaster, the concrete surface shall be pock marked with a pointed tool to ensure a
proper key for the plaster.

The wall shall be dampened evenly and not soaked before application of plaster. If the
surface becomes dry in spots, such areas shall be moistened again.

10.1.9. APPLICATION OF PLASTER

10.1.9.1. Plaster application shall be commenced only after the preparatory work is approved by the
Client/PMC. To ensure even thickness and a true surface, plaster about 10 cm to 15 cm
square shall be first applied horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2m intervals over the
entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of those gauged areas shall be truly in the
plane of the finished plastered surface and finished as approved by the Client/PMC to give a
smooth, true and even surface.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 104

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Plastering of cornices, decorative features etc. shall be completed before the finishing coat is
applied.

In all plaster work, mortar shall be firmly applied with the thickness more than the required
thickness and spread evenly well pressed in to the joint and on the surface and rubbed,
levelled and smoothened with straight edge, wooden float and trowel to the required
thickness and finished as approved by the Client/PMC to give a smooth true and even surface.
Plaster when more than 15mm thick, shall be applied in two coats a base coat followed by the
finishing coat. Thickness of the base coat shall be just sufficient to fill up all unevenness in the
surface, no single coat, however shall exceed 12mm in thickness. The lower coat shall be
thicker than the upper coat. The overall thickness of the coats shall not be less than the
minimum thickness shown on the drawings. The undercoat shall be allowed to dry and shrink
before applying the second coat of plaster. After a suitable time interval (Preferably not more
than 5 days) the second coat may be applied. The under coat shall be scratched or roughened
before it is fully hardened to form a mechanical key.

The finished wall surface shall be true to plumb, and the Contractor shall, without any extra
cost, make up any irregularity in the masonry and concrete work with plaster. All vertical
edges of brick pillars door jambs etc. shall be chamfered or rounded off as directed by the
Client/PMC. All corners must be finished to their true angles or rounded. Any plastering that
is damaged shall be repaired and left in good condition at the completion of the job.

10.1.9.2. Grooves in Plaster

Where specified in drawings, rectangular grooves 12 to 20mm wide and 8 to 10mm deep at
the quoted rate shall be provided in external plaster by means of timber battens or metal
strips, fixed on plaster when plaster is still green. Battens or strips shall be carefully removed
after initial set of plaster and broken edges and corners made good. All grooves shall be
uniform in width and depth and shall be truly plumb and correctly aligned.

10.1.9.3. Drip Course

Drip course wherever indicated in the drawings shall be provided at the time of plastering to
prevent travelling of water drops from the projections. Unless otherwise, specified, projected
strip form drip course shall be provided with the quoted rate.

10.1.9.4. Thickness of plaster shall be as specified. Any extra thickness of plaster required to be
plastered in the case of brick masonry or extra thickness required due to raking of the joints
or filling up depressions formed in concrete surface during the course of roughening or due to
bad casting or centering shall not be paid separately, but shall be covered by the general rate
for plastering.

10.1.9.5. The rate for plastering shall include the cost of scaffolding, platform, swing etc. needed for
carrying out the plaster work and shall cover the extra labour for plastering the joints, sills
and soffits of openings. No extra payment shall be made for roughening the surface to obtain
key for plastering work.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 105

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

10.1.9.6. Finishes

The interior plaster shall generally be finished to a smooth surface. Wherever punning is
indicated, the interior plaster shall be finished rough. The exterior surface, shall generally be
finished with a wooden float. Wherever any +/*-+special treatment to the plastered surface is
indicated, the work shall be done exactly as shown on the drawings, to the entire satisfaction
of the Client/PMC regarding the texture, colour and finish. Ceiling Plaster – Plaster to ceilings,
soffits or stairs flight slabs and similar locations, where called for, shall be as specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.

10.1.9.7. Rough Cast Finish

The plaster shall be laid in two coats. The first coat shall consist of one part of cement and
four parts of clean sharp sand or as specified. The thickness of the first coat shall be just
sufficient to fill-up all unevenness in the surface under treatment but shall not exceed 12mm.
The plaster shall be laid by throwing the mortar by using a strong whipping motion on the
prepared surface with a trowel in a uniform layer and pressed to form a good bond. The
surface shall not be smoothened. The second coat shall consist of one part of cement, one
part of specially selected and graded sand, one parts of gravel / crushed stone of size 6 to
12mm or as approved by the Client/PMC.

The thickness of this coat shall be 7mm to 8mm. The cement and aggregates shall be mixed
dry in the proportion by volume as specified. Water shall be added to form a plastic mix easily
workable. The second coat shall be applied while the first coat is still soft and plastic. The
plastic mix shall be flung upon the first coat with large trowel to form an even and decorative
coat.

10.1.9.8. Rough cast plaster with colour finish

This finish shall be similar to “Rough Cast Finish” above except a high grade mineral pigment
of approved shade shall be mixed with white cement instead of ordinary grey cement while
preparing the mortar for finishing coat.

10.1.9.9. Sand Faced Finish

The plaster shall be applied in two coats consisting of an undercoat of cement mortar (1:4),
12mm thick and a finishing coat with cement mortar (1:3), 6mm thick. The sand used in the
finishing coat shall pass through 4.75mm sieve and be retained on 2.36mm sieve. Key should
be formed on the uniformly levelled surface of base coat by thoroughly combing it in many
horizontal lines about 12mm apart and 3mm deep when the mortar is still plastic. The
finishing coat shall be applied a day or two after. The surfaces of the finishing coat shall be
tapped and treated to obtain a uniform fine grained texture with the help of sponges, felt
pads, etc. Care shall be taken to see that the cement used is of the same shade throughout
the work.

10.1.9.10 Pebble Dash Finish

Mortar of required thickness consisting of one part cement and four parts sand by volume or
as specified shall be applied to form a base coat in the usual manner as described under

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 106

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

plastering. While the mortar is still plastic, small pebbles or crushed stone of size generally
from 10mm to 20mm as approved by the Client/PMC shall be thrown to the plastered
surface. The aggregate shall be lightly tapped into the mortar with a wooden unit float or the
flat end of a trowel, in order to ensure satisfactory bond between the dashing and the
mortar.

10.1.9.11 Curing

Finished plaster shall be kept wet for atleast 7 days after completion. In hot weather, walls
exposed to such shall be screened with matting kept constantly wet or by any other approved
means.

10.1.10. POINTING

10.1.10.1. The materials, preparation of mortar etc. shall be same as specified for cement plaster works.
The mix proportion shall not be leaner than 1:3, unless otherwise specified. For all exposed
brickwork or stone masonry work, self supporting double scaffolding, having two sets of
vertical supports shall be provided so as to avoid openings in the wall.

10.1.10.2. Preparation of surface

The joints shall be raked out properly to such a depth that the minimum depth of the new
mortar measured from either the sunk surface of the finished pointing or from the edge of
the brick shall not be less than 10mm. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out.
Efflorescence, if any shall be removed by brushing and scraping. The surface shall then be
thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before commencement of pointing.

10.1.10.3. Application of mortar and Finishing

The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints, with a pointing trowel, flush, sunk or
raked, according to the type of pointing required. The mortar shall not spread over the
corner, edges or surface of the masonry. The pointing shall then be finished with the proper
tool according to the type of pointing required.

10.1.10.4. Type of Pointing

a). Ruled pointing

Unless otherwise specified ruled pointing shall be adopted for all exposed brick/block
masonry work. However, for rubble masonry works, recessed pointing shall be adopted.

The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints and shall be finished off flush and
then while the mortar is still green, a groove of shape and size as shown in drawings shall
be formed by running a forming tool straight along the centre line of joints. This
operation shall be continued till a smooth and hard surface is obtained. The vertical joints
shall also be finished in a similar way. The vertical joints shall make true right angles at
their junctions with the horizontal lines and shall not project beyond the same. For
recessed pointing in rubble masonry recess shall be provided along the centre line of the
joint profile.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 107

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

b). Flush pointing

The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished off flush and level with
the edges of the brick, tiles or stones so as to give a smooth appearance. The edges shall
be neatly trimmed with a trowel and straight edge. Unless otherwise specified, flush
pointing shall be adopted for drains and brick on edge paving.

c) Raised and cut pointing

Raised and cut pointing shall project from the wall facing with its edges cut parallel so as
to have a uniformly raised band about 6mm raised and width 10mm or more as directed.
The superfluous mortar shall be cut off from the edges of the lines and the surface of the
masonry shall also be cleaned off all mortar. Unless otherwise specified, raised and cut
pointing shall be adopted for stone masonry pointing, and shall be provided along the
Centre line of the joint profile.

10.1.10.5. Curing: The pointing shall be kept wet for 7days.

10.1.11. MODE OF MEASUREMENT

Unless noted otherwise in the bills of quantities, the method of measurement for various
items shall be generally in accordance with IS:1200 subject to the following:

All plastering work shall be measured in square metres unless otherwise described.

Net area of surface plastered shall be measured. No deductions will be made for ends of
joists, beams, posts, etc. and openings not exceeding 0.5sqmt each and no addition shall be
made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills, etc. of these openings.

10.2. SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING

10.2.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

The work covered under these specifications consist of furnishing the various types of paints
and also the workmanship for these items, in strict compliance with these specifications,
which are given in detail here-in-after with the item of schedule of quantities.

10.2.2. MATERIALS:

10.2.2.1. Paints, oils, varnishes etc. of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. Ready mixed
paints as received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be used. If for any
reason, thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner
recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Client/PMC shall be used.
Approved paints, oils or varnishes shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in
their original containers in sealed condition. The materials shall be brought in at a time in
adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnights work. The materials
shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the Client/PMC. The empties shall not

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 108

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

be removed from the site of work, till the relevant item of work has been completed and
permission obtained from the Client/PMC.

10.2.2.2. The contractor shall associate the chemist of paint manufacturers before commencement of
work, during and after the completion of work who shall certify the suitability of the surface
to receive painting and the paint before use etc.

10.2.3. COMMENCING WORK:

10.2.3.1. Scaffolding:

Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports tied together by

horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No ballies, bamboos or planks
shall rest on or touch the surface which is being painted.

10.2.3.2. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid
damage or scratches to walls.

10.2.3.3. For painting of the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.

10.2.3.4. Painting shall not be started until and unless the Client/PMC has inspected the items of
work to be painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to
commence the painting work.

10.2.3.5. Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in hand after all other builders
work, practically finished.

10.2.3.6. The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up at least one
day in advance of the paint work being started.

10.2.4. PREPARATION OF SURFACE:

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All dirt, rust, scales, smoke and grease shall be
thoroughly removed before painting is started. Minor patches if any in plastered/form
finished surfaces shall be repaired and finished in line and level in C.M. 1:1 and cracks &
crevices shall be filled with approved filler, by the contractor at no extra cost to the Client.
The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Client/PMC after inspection,
before painting is commenced.

10.2.5. APPLICATION:

10.2.5.1. Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
containers. When applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller
containers so that consistency is kept uniform.

10.2.5.2. The external surfaces of the buildings under reference including the R.C.C. Jalli, fins and the
panels above and below the window etc. shall be finished in different colours of approved
shade. The contractor will make suitable samples at site for Clients approval before taking
up the work in hand and they will be allowed to proceed with the work only after getting
Clients approval for the same.

11.2.5.3. The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 109

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

later in the direction of the grain in case of wood. The crossing & laying off consists of
covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time and then brushing
alternately in opposite directions two or three time and then finally brushing lightly in
direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the
laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying will constitute one coat.

11.2.5.4. Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done with spraying. Spray machine used may be
(a) a high pressure (small air aperture) type or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type,
depending on the nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced
workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the
requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner. Spraying should be done only when dry
condition prevails.

11.2.5.5. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is
applied. This should be facilitated by thorough ventilation.

11.2.5.6. Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine pumice
stone and cleaned of dust before the next coat is laid.

11.2.5.7. No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, containers shall be
kept properly closed.

11.2.5.8. The final painted surface shall present a uniform appearance and no streaks, blisters, hair
marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles of moldings
etc. shall be left on the work.

11.2.5.9. In case of cement based paints/primers, the absorbent surfaces shall be evenly damped so as
to give even suction. In any weather, freshly painted surfaces shall be kept damp for at least
two days.

11.2.5.10. In painting doors and windows, the putty around the glass panes must also be painted, but
care must be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and
surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not be left out while painting. Perspect covers of
electrical switch boxes have to be painted from inside by removing them. Care shall be taken
while removing them in position after painting with respective approved paints. In painting
steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps etc.

11.2.5.11. The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints shall be as in accordance to
the detailed specifications under the respective headings.

11.2.5.12. Any damage caused during painting work to the existing works/surfaces shall be made good
by the contractor at his own cost.

11.2.6. BRUSHES AND CONTAINERS:

After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned off paint and linseed oil by rinsing with
turpentine. A brush in which paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for
painting work. The containers, when not in use, shall be closed, kept air tight and shall be
kept at a place free from dust. When the paint has been used, the containers shall be washed

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 110

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, so that they are clean & can be used
again.
11.2.7. MEASUREMENT:

11.2.7.1. Painting, unless otherwise stated shall be measured by area in square metre. Length and
breadth shall be measured correct upto two places of decimal of a metre.

11.2.7.2. No deduction shall be made for opening not exceeding 0.05sqmt. and no addition shall be
made for painting to the beading, moulding edges, jambs, soffits, sills, architraves etc. of
such openings.

11.2.7.3. In measuring painting, varnishing, oiling etc. of joinery and steel work etc., the co-efficients
as in the following table shall be used to obtain the areas payable. The co-efficients shall be
applied to the areas measured flat and not girthed in all cases.

11.2.7.4. In case of painting of door shutter with push plates in plastic laminate, deduction will be
made for area of such laminations.

11.2.7.5. Table of Co-efficients to be applied over areas of different surfaces to get equivalent plain
areas.

MULTIPLYING CO-
Sl.No. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
EFFICIENTS
1. WOOD WORK : DOORS, WINDOWS etc;
1.1. Panelled or framed and braced doors, windows etc. 1.30 (for each side)

1.2. Ledged & battened or ledged, battened & braced 1.30 (for each side)
doors, windows etc.
1.3. Flush doors etc 1.20 (for each side)
1.4. Part panelled and part glazed or gauzed doors, 1.00 (for each side)
windows etc.
1.5. Fully glazed or gauzed doors, windows etc. 0.80 (for each side)
1.6. Fully venetioned or louvered doors, windows etc. 1.80 (for each side)
1.7. Trellis (or Jaffri) work one way or two way 2.00 (for painting all over)
1.8. Carved or enriched work 2.00 (for each side)
1.9. Weather boarding 1.20 (for each side)
1.10. Wood shingle roofing 1.10 (for each side)
1.11. Boarding with cover fillets and match boarding 1.05 (for each side)
1.12. Tile and slate battening 0.80 (for painting all over)
2. STEEL WORK: DOORS, WINDOWS ETC
2.1. Plain sheeted steel door or windows 1.10 (for each side)
2.2. Fully glazed or gauzed steel doors and windows 0.50 (for each side)
2.3. Partly panelled and partly gauzed or glazed doors 0.80 (for each side)
and windows
2.4. Corrugated sheeted steel doors or windows 1.25 (for each side)
2.5. Collapsible gates 1.50 (for painting all over)

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 111

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

2.6. Rolling shutters of inter locked laths 1.10 (for each side)
3. GENERAL WORKS
3.1. Expanded metal, hard drawn steel wire fabric of 1.00 (for painting all over)
approved quality, grill work and gratings in over)
guard bars, balusters, railings, partitions and
3.2. Open palisade fencing and gates including 1.00 (for painting all over)
standards, braces, rails, stays etc. in timber or steel.

NOTE: The height shall be taken from the bottom of the lowest rail, if the palisades do not
go below it (or from the lower end of palisades, if they project below the lowest rail) upto
the top of palisades but not upto the top of standards, if they are higher than the palisades.
3.3. Corrugated iron sheeting in roofs, side cladding etc; 1.14 (for each side)
3.4. A.C. Corrugated sheeting in roofs, side cladding etc; 1.20 (for each side)
3.5. A.C. Semi-corrugated sheeting in roofs, side cladding 1.10 (for each side)
etc. or Nainital pattern using plain sheets.
3.6. Wire gauze shutters including painting of wire gauze 1.00 (for each side)

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 112

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.8. Explanatory notes on the table of Co-efficients.

11.2.8.1. where doors, window etc. are of composite types other than those included in para
11.2.7.3, the different portions shall be measured separately with their appropriate co-
efficients, the centre line of the common rail being taken as the dividing line between the
two portions.

11.2.8.2. Measurements for doors, windows etc. shall be taken flat (and not girthed) over all
including chowkhats or frames, where provided. Where chowkhats or frames are not
provided, the shutter measurements shall be taken.

11.2.8.3. Collapsible gates shall be measured for width from outside to outside of gate in its
expanded position and for height from bottom to top of channel verticals. No separate
measurements shall be taken for the top and bottom guide, rails, rollers, fittings etc.

11.2.8.4. Rolling shutters of interlocked laths shall be measured for the actual shutter width and the
height from bottom of opening to the centre of the shaft. No separate measurements shall
be taken for painting guides and other exposed features within or outside the shutter area.
The painting of top cover or hood shall however be measured separately.

11.2.8.5. Co-efficients for sliding doors shall be the same as for normal types of doors as mentioned
in the table. Measurements shall be taken outside of shutters, and no separate
measurements shall be taken for painting guides, rollers, fittings etc.

11.2.8.6. Measurement of painting of doors, windows, collapsible gates, rolling shutters etc. as
above shall be deemed to include painting all iron fittings in the same or different shade
for which no extra will be paid.

11.2.8.7. The measurements as above shall be deemed to include also the painting of edges, blocks,
cleats etc. for which no extra will be paid.

11.2.8.8. The co-efficients for doors and windows shall apply irrespective of the size of frames and
shutter members.

11.2.8.9. When the two faces of a door, window etc. are to be treated with different specified
finishes, measurable under separate items, the edges of frames and shutters shall be
treated with the one or the other type of finish as ordered by the Client/PMC, and
measurement of this will be deemed to be included in the measurement of the face treated
with that finish.

11.2.8.10. In the case where shutters are fixed on both faces of the frames, the measurements for the
door frame and shutter on one face shall be taken in the manner already described, while
the additional shutter on the other face will be measured for the shutter area only excluding
the frame. Where shutters are provided with clearance at top or/and bottom, such openings
shall be deducted from the overall measurements and relevant co-efficients shall be applied
to obtain the area payable.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 113

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.8.11. In case of trellis (or Jaffri) work, the measurements shall include the painting of the frame
member for which no separate measurements shall be taken. Trellis door or window
shutters shall also be measured under trellis work.

11.2.8.12. Wherever air conditioning grill, lighting, fixtures etc. in false ceiling are painted along with,
measurements shall be taken over all without deductions for opening in grills and no extra
shall be paid for the grills. If grills, fixtures etc. are not painted, area of fixtures or grills as
measured flat (not girthed) shall be deducted when it exceeds 0.05sqmt individuals. Where
walls and ceilings are painted in separate colours, the junctions of two paints shall be
brought down on the walls in a straight line by about 6mm.to 12mm. if so desired, if the
junctions of walls and ceilings are not even. Nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor on
this account. Beading wherever provided shall not be measured separately but shall be
deemed to be included in the area of false ceiling etc. measured flat (not girthed).

11.2.8.13. For painting open palisade fencing and gates etc., the height shall be measured from the
bottom of the lowest rail, if the palisades do not go below it, (or from the lower end of the
palisades, if they project below the lowest rail), upto the top of rails or palisades whichever
are higher, but not up to the top of standards when the latter are higher than the top rails or
palisades.

11.2.8.14. In the case of asbestos cement corrugated or semi-corrugated sheeting and iron corrugated
sheeting in roofs, side cladding etc., the work shall be measured flat (not girthed) as fixed.

11.2.8.15. For trusses, compound girders, stanchions, lattice girder and similar work, actual areas will
be measured in sqmt; and no extra shall be paid for painting on bolt heads, nuts, washers
etc. even when they are picked out in a different tint to the adjacent work.

11.2.8.16. Painting of rain water, soil, waste, vent and water pipes etc. shall be measured in running
metre of the particular diametre of the pipe concerned. Painting of specials such as bends,
heads, branches, junctions, shoes etc. shall be included in the length and no separate
measurements shall be taken for these or for painting brackets, clamps etc.

11.2.8.17. Measurements of wall surfaces and wood and other works not referred to already shall be
recorded as per actual and opening exceeding 0.05sqmt shall be deducted to get the net
payable area. Length and breadth shall be measured correct up to two places of decimal of a
metre and area so worked out shall be correct up to two places of decimal of a square
metre.

11.2.8.18. In case the items of work requiring painting are inclusive of cost of painting, the painting
carried out shall not be measured separately.

11.2.9. PRECAUTIONS:

All furnitures, lightings, fixtures, sanitary fittings, glazing, floors etc. shall be protected by
covering and stains, smears, splashings, if any shall be removed and any damage done shall
be made good by the contractor at his cost.

11.2.10. RATES:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 114

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Rates shall include cost of all labour and materials involved on all the operations described
above and in the particular specifications given under the several items.

11.2.11. PAINTING PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED SURFACES:

11.2. 11.1. Primer:

11.2.11.1.1. The primer for wood work, iron work or plastered surface shall be as specified in the
description of the item.

11.2.11.1.2. Primer for Wood work / Iron & Steel / Plastered / Aluminium surfaces shall be as specified
below:

Sl.No. SURFACES PRIMER TO BE USED

1. Wood work (hard & soft wood) Pink conforming to I.S.3536-1966
2. Resinous wood and ply wood Aluminium primer
3. Iron & Steel, Aluminium and galvanised Zinc chromate primer conforming to
Steel work I.S.104-1962
4. Plastered surfaces, cement brick work, Cement Primer
Asbestos surfaces for oil bound distemper
and paint

11.2.11.1.3. The primer shall be ready mixed primer of approved brand and manufacture.

11.2.11.2. Preparation of surface:

11.2.11.2.1. Wood work:

The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with
sand paper and shall be well dusted. Knots, if any, shall be covered with preparation of red
lead made by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot.
Appropriate filler material with same shade as paint shall be used where so desired by the
Client/PMC.

The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before painting is applied. After the priming
coat is applied, the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glaziers
putty or wood putty (for specifications for glaziers putty and wood putty- refer as
mentionedhere-in-before). Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as
the wood will absorb the oil in the stopping and the latter is therefore liable to crack.

11.2.11.2.2. Iron and Steel Work:

All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes.
Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which becomes
loose by rusting, shall be removed.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 115

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface.

if the surface is wet, it shall be dried before priming coat is undertaken.

11.2.11.2.3. Plastered Surface:

The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried completely. Trial patches of
primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall be taken in
hand. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations shall be filled up with plaster of Paris
and rubbed smooth.

11.2.11.3. Application: The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and
spread even and smooth. The painting shall be done by crossing and laying off as described
here-in-before.

11.2.11.4. Other Details: The specifications for Painting (General) in para 32.2 shall hold good so far as
it is applicable.

11.2.12. PAINTING WITH SUPERIOR QUALITY & FLAT OIL READY MIXED PAINTS ON NEW SURFACE:

11.2.12.1. Paint: Ready mixed paints shall be of approved brand and manufacture and of the required
shades. They shall conform in all respects to the relevant I.S. specifications.

11.2.12.2. Preparation of Surface:

11.2.12.2.1. Wood work:

The surface shall be cleaned and all unevenness removed as in para 11.2.11.2. Knots if
visible shall be covered with a preparation of red lead. Holes and indentations on the
surface shall be filled in with glaziers putty or wood putty and rubbed smooth before
painting is done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before painting.

11.2.12.2.2. Iron and steel work: The primer coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started. Rust and scaling shall be carefully removed by scraping or by brushing with steel
wire brushes. All dust and dirt shall be carefully and thoroughly wiped away.

11.2.12.2.3 Plastered surfaces: The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started. All dust or dirt that has settled on the priming coat shall be thoroughly wiped before
painting is started.

11.2.12.3. Application: The specifications mentioned here-in-before shall hold good as far as
applicable.

11.2.12.4. The number of coats to be applied will be as stipulated in the item. The painted surface shall
present a uniform appearance1 and glossy/semi glossy finish, free from streaks, blisters etc.

11.2.12.5. Other details: The specifications for Painting (General) specified here-in-before shall hold
good in so far as they are applicable.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 116

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.13. PAINTING WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL/SEMI GLOSSY PAINT:

11.2.13.1. Paint: Synthetic enamel/semi glossy paint of approved brand and manufacture and required
shade shall be used for the top coat and an under coat of shade to match the top coat as
recommended by the manufacturer shall be used. The paint shall be conforming to IS: 1932-
1964.

11.2.13.2. Preparation of Surface: This shall be as per painting with superior quality ready mixed paint
as mentioned here-in-before.

11.2.13.3. Application: The number of coats including the under coat shall be as stipulated in the item.

11.2.13.4. Under Coat: One coat of the specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall
be applied and allowed to dry over night. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of
wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface free from brush marks and all
loose particles shall be dusted off. All the cracks, crevices, roughness etc. will be filled with
approved putty as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

11.2.13.5. Top Coat : Finishing coats of specified paint of the desired colour & shade shall be applied
after the under coat is thoroughly dried. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found
necessary to ensure a proper and uniform semi glossy surface.

11.2.13.6. Other Details : The specifications for “Painting (General)” mentioned here-in-before shall
hold good as far as they are applicable.

11.2.14. PAINTING WITH ACRYLIC EMULSION/PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT:

11.2.14.1. This shall be polyvinyl based Acrylic/plastic emulsion paint of approved manufacture of the
required shade, conforming to I.S.5411-1969.

11.2.14.2. Primer: The primer to be used for the painting with acrylic emulsion on cement concrete
surfaces, plastered surfaces, A.C. sheets, timber and metal surfaces, if necessary, shall be of
approved base and as per recommendations of the manufacturers.

11.2.14.3. Putty: Plaster filler to be used for filling up (putting) uneven surfaces, small cracks and holes
etc. shall be of approved compound and as per recommendations of the manufacturers. No
oil based putty shall be used. The putty should be made from a mixture of whiting and
plastic emulsion paint or as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

11.2.14.4. Finishing coats: All the finishing coats shall be of matt finish or any other finish as required
by the Client/PMC. The number of finishing coats shall be as specified in the item.

11.2.14.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: All the measurements for payment shall be taken on net surface
area actually painted, unless otherwise specified. Deduction will be made from the areas for
fixtures, grills, ventilation, outlets, electrical boxes and such obstructions not painted, if they
are individually more than 0.05sqmt.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 117

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.14.6. JOB REQUIREMENTS:

11.2.14.6.1. Acrylic emulsion paint is required to be provided on plastered and concrete surfaces in
portions of the building. The Client shall reserve the option to delete or increase quantities
in full or part from the scope of contract during progress of work.

11.2.14.6.2 All wood surfaces are to be painted with semi glossy synthetic enamel paint with an
approved primer.

11.2.14.6.3 All shades and colours of paints shall be subjected to review and prior approval of
Client/PMC shall be taken before the application.

11.2.15. WHITE WASHING WITH LIME:

11.2.15.1 Preparation of Surface: Before new work is white washed, the surface shall be thoroughly
brushed free from mortar droppings and foreign-matter.

11.2.15.2 In the case of old work, all loose pieces and scales shall be scrapped off and holes in plaster
as well as patches of less than 0.05sqmt area each shall be filled up with mortar of the same
mix. Where so specifically ordered by the Client/PMC, the entire surface of old white wash
shall be thoroughly removed by scrapping and this shall be paid for separately.

11.2.15.3 Preparation of lime wash: The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime “Katani”
or equivalent. The lime shall be thoroughly slaked on the spot, mixed and stirred with
sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours
and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 40gm. of gum dissolved in hot
water, shall be added to each 10 cubic decimeter of the cream. The approximate quantity of
water to be added in making the cream will be 5litres of water to one kg. of lime.

11.2.15.4 Indigo (Neel) up to 3gm per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added and wash
stirred well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 5litres per kg of lime to produce
a milky solution.

11.2.15.5 The lime shall be tested in a chemical laboratory and test certificate submitted, to conform
the quality of lime with regard to its physical and chemical properties. The cost of testing
lime shall be borne by the contractor.

11.2.15.6 White Washing: The white wash shall be applied with brushes or by spray in the specified
number of coats. The operation for each coat in the case of brush application shall consist of
a stroke of the brush given from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards
over the first stroke, and similarly one stroke horizontally from the right and another from
the left before it dries.

11.2.15.7 Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be
inspected and approved by the Client/PMC before the subsequent coat is applied. No
portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 118

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.15.8 For new work, three or more coats shall be applied till the surface present a smooth and
uniform finish through which the plaster does not show. The finished dry surface shall not
show any sign of cracking and peeling nor shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed.

11.2.15.9 For old work, after the surface has been prepared as described here -in-before, a coat of
white wash shall be applied over the patches and repairs. Then a single coat or two or more
coats of white wash as stipulated in the description of the item shall be applied over the
entire surface. The white washed surface should present a uniform finish through which the
plasters patched do not appear. The washing on ceiling should be done prior to that on
walls.

11.2.15.10 Protective Measures: Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of
the building not to be white washed shall be protected from being splashed upon.
Splashings and droppings, if any, shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost and the
surfaces cleaned. Damages if any to painted surfaces, furniture or fittings and fixtures etc.
shall be recoverable from the contractor.

11.2.15.11 Measurements: All measurements for payment shall be taken on net surface areas actually
white washed, unless otherwise specified. Deductions will be made from the areas for
fixtures, grills, ventilation, outlets, electrical boxes and such obstruction not painted if they
are individually more than 0.05sqmt Length and breadth shall be taken correct up to two
places of decimal of a metre and areas so worked out shall be correct up to two places of
decimals of a square metre.

Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so measured shall be
increased by the following percentages to allow for the girthed area.

Corrugated asbestos cement sheets 20%

Semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets 10%

The number of coats of each treatment shall be stated. The item shall include removing
nails, making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.05sqmt each with materials
similar in composition to the surface to be prepared.

Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.

11.2.16. COLOUR WASHING:

11.2.16.1. In the case of colour washing, mineral colours, not affected by lime, shall be added to white
wash with proper glue. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash to
the required tint or shade has been got approved from the Client/PMC. The colour shall be
of even tint or shade over the whole surface. If it is patchy or otherwise badly applied, it
shall be redone by the contractor, at no extra cost to the Client.

11.2.16.2 For new work, the priming coat shall be of white wash lime or with whiting as specified in
the description of the item. Two or three coats, shall then be applied as specified on the

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 119

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

entire surface till it represents a smooth and uniform finish. Each coat after applying shall be
got approved from the Client/PMC.

11.2.16.3 The finished dry surface shall not be powdery and shall not readily come off on the hand
when rubbed.

11.2.16.4 Other specifications as detailed for Whitewashing with lime shall be applicable. Indigo (Neel)
shall however, not be added.

11.2.17. DRY DISTEMPERING:

11.2.17.1. Distemper: Dry distemper (IS: 427-1965) of approved brand and manufacture, colour and
required shade shall be used. The dry distemper shall be stirred slowly in clean water using
0.6litre of water per kg. of distemper or as specified by the manufacturers. Warm water
shall preferably be used. It shall be allowed to stand for atleast 30minutes before use. The
mixture shall be invariably well stirred before and during use to maintain an even
consistency.

11.2.17.2 Preparation of surface: This shall be as for Painting work mentioned here-in-before in so far
as it is applicable.

11.2.17.3 Application: In case of new work, the treatment shall consist of a priming coat followed by
the application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even colour.

11.2.17.3.1 Priming coat: Priming coat of whiting shall be applied over the prepared surface. The whiting
(ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity of warm water and thoroughly
stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then be screened through a clean coarse cloth. Two
kg of gum and 0.4kg of copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for
every cum. of the slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the consistency of milk so
as to make a wash ready for use. No white washing coat shall be used as a priming coat for
distempering.

11.2.17.3.2 The application of each coat as mentioned in the specifications for painting (General) here-
in-before, shall hold good, as far as it is applicable.

11.2.18. OIL EMULSION (OIL BOUND) DISTEMPERING:

11.2.18.1 Oil bound distemper (IS:428-1969) of approved brand and manufacture, colour and required
shade shall be used. The primer where used as on new work shall be cements primer or
distemper primer as specified in the item. These shall be of the same manufacture as
distemper. The distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a
manner recommended by manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for
days work shall be prepared.

11.2.18.2 Preparation of surfaces: The surface shall be prepared as described here- in- before for
Painting work in so far as it is applicable and approved putty/filler shall be applied to the
entire area to get uniform and smooth surface before application of primer.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 120

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.18.3 Application: The cement primer or distemper primer shall be applied by brushing and not by
spraying. Hurried priming work shall be avoided, particularly on absorbent surfaces. New
plaster patches in old work before applying oil bound distemper shall be treated with
cement primer/distemper primer. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible
leaving no brush marks. Priming coat shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours before oil
bound distemper is applied. Before applying distemper the surface shall be lightly sand
prepared to make it smooth for receiving the oil bound distemper, taking care not to rub out
the priming coat. A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between consecutive
coats to permit the proper drying of the preceding coat. Two or more coats of distemper as
are found necessary shall be applied over the priming coat to obtain an even shade.

11.2.18.4 Other details: The specifications for “Painting (General)” mentioned here-in-before shall
hold good as far as it is applicable.

11.2.19. WATER PROOFING CEMENT BASED PAINT:

11.2.19.1 Material: Cement based paint (IS: 5410-1969) of approved manufacture, quality, shade and
colour only shall be used.

11.2.19.2 Preparation of surfaces: The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt,
dust, algae, grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing the surfaces. The
surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the water proof cement paint is
applied. The prepared surface shall be got approved before painting is commenced.

11.2. 19.2.1 The water proof cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an
hour of its mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish.

11.2.19.2.2 Water proof cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall
comprise of 2parts of water proof cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly
and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to add the water proof cement paint
gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage shall comprise of adding further
one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain liquid of workable and
uniform consistency. In all cases the manufacturer’s instruction shall be followed
meticulously.

11.2.19.3 Application: The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or
spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. To
avoid direct heat of the sun during painting, the cement based paint shall be applied on the
surface which is on the shady side. Cement based paint shall not be applied on the surfaces
already treated with white wash, colour wash, dry or oil bound distemper, varnishes, paints
etc. It shall not be applied on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.

11.2.19.4 Other details : The specifications for Painting (General) mentioned here-in-before shall hold
good as far as they are applicable.

11.2.19.5 Mode of measurement for dry distemper, oil bound distemper and water proof cement
paint: All measurement for payment shall be taken on net surface area actually painted
unless otherwise specified and no co-efficient shall be applied for working out areas.
Deductions will be made from areas for opening/obstructions not painted, if they are

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 121

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

individually more than 0.05sqmt. Length and breadth shall be taken correct up to two places
of decimal of a metre and areas shall be worked out correct up to two places of decimal of a
square metre.

11.2.19.5.1 Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so measured shall be
increased by the following percentage to allow the girthed area: a) Corrugated asbestos
cement sheets - 20%; b) Semi corrugated asbestos cement sheets - 10%.

11.2.19.5.2 The number of coats of each treatment shall be stated in the schedule of quantities. The
whole surface shall be applied with approved putty/filler to get uniform and smooth surface
at no extra cost to the Client.

11.2.19.6 Rates: The rate shall include cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operation
described above.

11.2.20. BEES WAXING OR POLISHING WITH READY MADE WAX POLISH:

11.2.20.1 Materials: The polishing shall be done with bees waxing prepared locally or with readymade
wax polish of approved brand and manufacture, as stipulated in the description of item. a)
Where bees waxing are to be prepared locally, the following specifications for the same
shall apply: Pure bees wax free from paraffin or stearing adulterants shall be used. Its
specific gravity shall be 0.965 to 0.969 and melting point shall be 63o C. The polish shall be
prepared from a mixture of bees wax, linseed oil, turpentine and varnish in the ratio of 2:
1.5: 1: 0.5 by weight. The bees wax and boiled linseed oil shall be heated over a slow fire.
When the wax is completely dissolved, the mixture shall be cooled till it is just warm and
turpentine and varnish added to it in the required proportions and the entire mixture shall
be well stirred.

11.2.20.2 Preparation of surface: Preparation of surface will be as mentioned here-in-under para

11.2.32.20.2 with the exception that knotting, holes and cracks shall be stopped with a
mixture of fine saw dust formed of the wood being treated, beaten up with sufficient bees
wax to enhance cohesion.

11.2.20.3 Application: The polish shall be applied evenly with a clean soft pad of cotton cloth in such a
way that the surface is completely and fully covered. The surface is then rubbed
continuously for half an hour. When the surface is quite dry, a second coat shall be applied
in the same manner and rubbed continuously for one hour or until the surface is dry. The
final coat shall then be applied and rubbed for two hours (more if necessary) until the
surface has assumed a uniform gloss and is dry showing no sign of stickiness. The final polish
depends largely on the amount of rubbing which should be continuous and with uniform
pressure, with frequent changes in the direction.

11.2.20.4 Other details: The specifications for painting (General) as mentioned here-in-before shall
hold good as for as they are applicable.

11.2.21. FRENCH SPIRIT POLISHING: (ON NEW WORK WITH A COAT OF WOOD FILLER):

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 122

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

11.2.21.1 Polish: Pure shellac varying from pale orange to lemon yellow colour, free from resin or dirt
shall be dissolved in methylated spirit at the rate of 140 gm. of shellac to 1litre of spirit.
Suitable pigment shall be added to get the required shade.

11.2.21.2 Preparation of surface: The surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down
smooth with sand paper and well dusted off. Knots if visible shall be covered with a
preparation of red lead and glue size laid on while hot. Holes and indentations on the
surface shall be stopped with glaziers’ putty. The surface shall then be given a coat of wood
filler made by mixing whiting (ground chalk) in methylated spirit at the rate of 1.5 kg. of
whiting per litre of spirit. The surface shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with
glass paper and wiped clean.

11.2.21.3 Application: The number of coats of polish to be applied shall be as described in the Item. A
pad of woolen cloth covered by fine cloth shall be used to apply the polish. The pad shall be
moistened with the polish and rubbed hard on the wood, in a series of overlapping circles
applying the mixture sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even level
surface. A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad facilitates this operation. The surface
shall be allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the
pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cotton cloth, slightly damped with
methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface
shall have a uniform texture and high gloss.

11.2.21.4 Measurement, Rate and other Details: These shall be as for Painting (General) mentioned
here-in-before as far as they are applicable.

11.2.22. RESIN BASED THERMO PLASTIC PAINT (DECORATIVE AND PROTECTIVE FINISH):

11.2.22.1. Materials: Resin based thermo plastic paint such as Sandtex Matt or other equivalent
approved manufacture, colour and shade shall only be used.

11.2.22.2 Preparation of Surface & General: The Specifications for Painting (General) described here-
in-before shall hold good as for as they are applicable.

11.2.22.3 Protective Coatings: On surfaces such as ferrous metals, brass, copper and phosphor bronze,
a protective coating of suitable bituminous compound or chromated red oxide should be
given. New wood should be treated with a leafing grade aluminium primer or a water based
acrylic emulsion primer.

The surfaces with algae growth shall be thoroughly cleaned down to remove as much
growth as possible and effective solution of stabilized house hold bleach (calcium
hypochloride) of approved quality with approximate 35% chlorine content @ 2kgs per
50litres (or as per manufacturers recommendations) should be used to treat the surfaces.

On chalky or friable surfaces after removing the loose materials by stiff brushing or scraping
the surface should be treated with one coat of advanced solvent based material such as
snowsol stabilizing solution or other approved equivalent with white spirit.

11.2.22.4 Application: The ready mix Sandtex Matt or other equivalent approved resin based thermo
plastic paint shall be applied on clean and wetted surfaces by means of brushes or roller.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 123

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. To avoid direct heat
of the sun, the paint shall be applied on the side in shade.

On rough and textured surfaces, one under coat of cement based paint such as Snowcem or
other equivalent shall be applied before application of undiluted Sandtex Matt finish coat.
Incase of application of two coats of Sandtex Matt at normal temperatures, the first one
shall be diluted by addition of 25% water and the second coat direct. In extremely hot
environs, the second coat shall be diluted @ 2.5liters of water to 20liters of paint or as
directed.

Painting with resin based thermo plastic paint shall be carried out generally as per
manufacturer’s specifications.

11.2.22.5 Other Details: The specification for Painting (general) mentioned here-in-before shall hold
good as far as they are applicable.

Snowsol stabilized solution shall not be applied over bitumen. Snowsol stabilized solution
treated surfaces shall not be left unpainted for more than 2 (two) days. Gypsum based
materials shall not be used for filling of exterior cracks while preparation of surfaces.

11.2.22.6. Mode of Measurement: The painting unless otherwise mentioned shall be measured by
area in sqmt Up to two places of decimal. Length and breadth shall be measured correct up
to two places of decimal of a metre. Deduction will be made from the areas of fixtures,
grills, ventilation, outlets individually more than 0.05sqmt.

The item shall include removing nails, making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not
exceeding 0.1sqmt. each with materials similar in composition to the surface to be
prepared.

11.2.22.7 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above.

11.2.23. CONSUMPTION OF PAINT FOR DIFFERENT PAINTING ITEMS:

Sl.No. Brief description of painting works Consumption per

10sqmt area
1. Oil Bound Distemper on plastered surfaces
a) Cement Primer (one coat) 0.91 liters
b) Two finishing coats 1.60 kg
c) Three finishing coats 2.40 kg
2. Flat oil paint to plastered surfaces
a) Cement primer (one coat) 0.91 liters
b) Cement primer (two coats) 1.82 liters
c) Two finishing coats 1.72 liters
3. Acrylic Emulsion Paint
a) Cement primer (one coat) 0.91 liters
b) Two finishing coats 0.87 liters
c) Three finishing coats 1.30 liters

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 124

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

4. Cement Paint (old surfaces)

a) Two coats on sand faced plastered surface 4.10 kg
b) Two coats on rough cast plastered surface 7.70 kg
5. Cement Paint (New surfaces)
a)Two coats on sand faced plastered surface 4.50 kg
b)Two coats on rough cast plastered surfaces 8.50 kg
6. Enamel Paint to wood/steel
a) Wood primer (one coat) 0.90 liters
b) Steel primer (one coat) 0.75 liters
c) Two finishing coats on wood 1.40 liters
d) Two finishing coats on steel 1.35 liters
7. Flat Oil Paint to wood/steel work
a) Wood primer ( one coat) 0.90 liters
b) Steel primer (one coat) 0.75 liters
c) Two finishing coats on wood 0.75 liters
d) Two finishing coats on steel 1.70 liters
8. External Painting with flat oil paint
a) Cement primer (one coat) 1.00 liters
b) Two finishing coats 1.74 liters
9. Repainting old painted surfaces
a) Two coats of emulsion paint. 0.86 liters
b) Two coats of flat oil paint 1.59 liters
c) Two coats of enamel paint 1.35 liters

11.2.24. COVERAGE PER SQM ACHIEVED PER LITRE PAINT:

(Note: Coverage per Kg is mentioned with respective item).

Area
Area coverage Area coverage
coverage for
Sl.No. Name of paint for one coat per additional
two coats
(old work) coat
(new work)
1. Synthetic enamel paint 14 sqmt 8.5 sqmt 18 sqmt
2. Plastic emulsion paint 14 sqmt 8.5 sqmt 18 sqmt
3. Oil bound distemper 10 sqmt 6.0 sqmt 12 sqmt
4. Dry distemper 10 sqmt 6.5 sqmt 12 sqmt
5. White wash 5sqmt 3.5sqmt 10 sqmt
Note: Following things to be added
in
lime (i)adhesive (DDL/SDL)-5% of
lime
(ii) Neel (Blue) – 3gm per kg of lime

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 125

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

(iii)water-5kg of water per kg of

lime
6. Cement based paint 4.5 sqmt 2 sqmt 6 sqmt
7. Aluminium paint 20 sqmt 12.5 sqmt 28 sqmt
8. Bitumen paint 14 sqmt 14 sqmt 28 sqmt
9. Neeru (or lime punning with slacked 0.5 sqmt per kg
lime) over plaster of slacked lime
10. Red oxide metal primer 16 sqmt
11. Cement primer 12 sqmt
12. Wood primer 13 sqmt
Wax polishing of new wood work
13. with 20 sqmt 20 sqmt 20 sqmt
readymade polish
14. French or sprit polish 10.5 sqmt
15. Varnish 14 sqmt 8.5 sqmt 18 sqmt

-------End of Section-10------

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 126

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

SECTION-11- JOINERY WORKS:

11.1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOOD WORK:

11.1.1. SCOPE:

The work covered under this specification consists of providing, making and fixing of
wooden frames for doors in accordance with these specifications and drawings.

11.1.2. The relevant I.S.specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification.

Code
Sl.No. Description
Number
1. IS:287 Recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content
of timber.
2. IS:401 Code of practice for preservation of timber.
3. IS:851 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for construction work
in wood.
4. IS:1141 Code of practice for seasoning of timber.
5. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil (Part-XXI)
engineering works. (Wood work and joinery)
6. IS:1708 Method of testing of small clear specimens of (Part-1 to 18)
timber.
7. IS:7196 Specification for hold fast.

11.1.3. TEAK WOOD:

Unless otherwise specified all timber shall be of best quality C.P. teak wood well seasoned
and free from cracks, sap wood, knots, sags, warps etc. and shall have uniform grains of
good pattern.

All timber shall be kept dry and well protected from rain and moisture during construction
and shall be stored in dry godown approved by the Client/PMC to protect from fungi insects
and marine borers.

The timber shall be wrought and brought to correct dimensions as shown in the drawings.

All joints shall be true of proper fit and of the kid specified by the Client/PMC.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 127

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Timber embedded in or in contact with the masonry or concrete shall be painted with two
coats of approved wood preservative as directed.

The rate of wood works shall include the cost of all the labour, tools and materials including
wood preservative paint nails, pins, keys, wedges, screws, holdfasts etc. and erecting the
same in position and for painting with one coat of approved wood primer all specified.
11.1.4. TEAK WOOD FRAMES:

Door frames shall be of best quality timber of C.P. teak wood as specified and wrought and
put up to section as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Client/PMC.

They shall be properly framed and mortised and tongued together at right angles and set
correctly in the masonry or concrete.

The door frame shall rest on structural slabs and not on finished floor level.

Hot dip galvanized mild steel holdfasts 230mm long, 40mm wide and 3mm thick shall be
fixed as shown in drawing or as directed by the Client/PMC to hold the teakwood rough
ground frames/ door frames firmly in the masonry.

Where the rough ground/ frames are placed by the side of concrete surface they shall be
fixed firmly against the concrete surface by means of teak wood gutties and screws.

All hold fast shall be fastened to the frame using adequate number of GI screws.

The surfaces of frames in contact with masonry or concrete shall be painted with two coats
of bituminous paint.

The frame shall be as per drawing and shall be provided with triangular keys for the plaster
if indicated in the drawing.

All frames shall be protected with one coat of approved wood primer as specified.

While fixing the frames in position, the vertical members shall be held rigid temporarily by
means of wooden battens to avoid bending or distortion of members and to keep door
frame exactly in plumb.

The teakwood beading/ cover mould/ stopper of the specified sizes shall be fixed on to the
frame as shown in the drawings and shall be fixed on to the frame as shown in the drawings
and shall be free from knots and sap wood.

11.1.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

The door frame shall be measured in cubic metre/as specified in the boq.

The cubic contents for wood work shall be measured for the finished size, limiting to those
shown in the drawings or ordered by the Client/PMC.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 128

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The cubical content shall be worked out correct up to three places of decimals of a cubic
metre.

The cross sectional dimensions shall be measured equivalent to nearest enclosing rectangle
(least rectangle/ square) for wrought and planed sizes. The frames embedded below
finished floor shall not be measured.

11.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLUSH DOORS:

11.2.1. SCOPE:

The work covered under this specification consists of providing and fixing block flush door
shutter in accordance with the specification and drawings.

11.2.2. The relevant I.S.specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:204 (Part-1) Specification for tower bolts (ferrous metal)
2. IS:204 (Part-2) Specification for tower bolt (non ferrous metal)
3. IS:208 Specification for door handles
4. IS:723 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails.
5. IS:848 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for plywood.
6. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil (Part – XXI)
engineering works. (Wood work and joinery)
7. IS:1341 Specification for steel butt hinges
8. IS:1659 Specification for block boards
9. IS:1708 Method of testing of small clear specimens of (Part-1 to 18)
timber.
10. IS:1734 Method of test for plywood. (Part-1 to 20)
11. IS:2202 Specification for wooden flush door shutters. (Part-I &II)
(Solid core type).
12. IS:2209 Specification for mortise lock of timber. (Part-I)
13. IS:3564 Specification for door closers.
14. IS:4992 Specification for door handles for mortise lock.
15. IS:6760 Specification for slotted counter sunk head wood screws.

11.2.3. BLOCK BOARD FLUSH DOOR SHUTTER:

Flush door shutter shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-decorative
type conforming to I.S.2202.

The thickness and type of shutter shall be as specified in item of schedule of quantities.

Width and height of shutter shall be as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Client/PMC. All four edges of shutter shall be square.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 129

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

The shutter shall be free from twist or wrap in its plane. The moisture content in timbers
used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall be not more than 12 percent when
tested according to I.S.1708.

The core of flush door shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a frame
constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint.
The width of the stiles and rails shall not be less than 75mm and not more than 100mm.
The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 25mm. Stiles, rails and wooden strips
forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall
be parallel to the stiles.

End joints of the pieces of wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter,
stiles and rails shall be of one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be one species
only but it may or may not be the same species as that of the stiles and rails.

The face panel shall be formed by gluing by the hot-press process on both faces of the core
either plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or
in the plywood shall be between 1.0mm and 3.0mm. The thickness of the face veneers as
such or in the plywood shall between 0.5mm and 1.5mm for commercial veneer and
between 0.5 and 1.0mm for decorative veneers. The direction of the veneer adjacent to the
core shall be at right angles to the direction of the wooden strips. Finished faces shall be
sanded to smooth even texture.

Wherever edge lipping is specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters.
Lipping shall be done with battens of first class teakwood or as specified. Joints shall not be
permitted in lipping.

The shutters shall be single leaf or double leaves as shown in the drawings or as directed by
the Client/PMC. In case of double leaves shutters the meeting at stiles shall be rebated by
one third the thickness of the shutter. The rebating shall be either splayed or square type.

Wherever specified the opening for glazing of size as shown in drawing or as directed shall
be made in the shutter for vision panel and or louver. Opening for glazing shall be lipped
internally with teakwood batten of specified size. Tolerance on width and height shall be (+)
3mm and on thickness it shall be (+) 1.2mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be
uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8mm when measured
at any two points. Adhesive used for bonding various components like core, core frame,
lipping, cross bands, face veneers, plywood etc. of flush door shutters and for bonding
plywood shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin conforming to I.S.848. Samples of
flush door shutters shall be subjected to following tests in accordance with I.S.2202 (Part-
I&II):

a. End immersion test.

b. Knife test.

c. Glue adhesion test.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 130

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

All the sample shutters when tested shall satisfy the requirements of the tests as laid down
in I.S.2202 (Part – I & II) if the number of samples found unsatisfactory or a test is two or
more the entire lot shall be considered unsatisfactory. Fittings shall be provided to the
contractor free of cost by the Client as decided by Client/PMC. Screws for fixing these
fittings shall be provided by the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid for the same

11.2.4. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

Length and width of the shutter shall be measured to the nearest centimetre in closed
position covering the rebates of the frames but excluding the gap between the shutters and
the frame. Over laps of two shutters will not be measured.

All work shall be measured net as fixed and area calculated in square metre to nearest two
places of decimal.

No deduction shall be made for providing openings for vision panel/ louvers.

Rate quoted for the items shall cover all the specifications described above and for the
complete work as per item of work including all labour and materials. The work of providing
vision/ louver opening and making rebates in double shutter doors shall be measured and
paid for under relevant item of schedule of quantities.

11.2.5. TEAK WOOD PANELLED SHUTTERS:

Teak wood door shutter shall generally conform to standard laid in I.S.1002 or the latest
revision for requirements of materials, construction workmanship and shall be of specified
thickness and of 1st class C.P. teak wood or as specified of approved design with stiles, top,
bottom and lock rail generally as per drawing. Wherever shown, each panel shall be in a
single width piece, but when two or more pieces have to be used and are permitted, all of
them shall be of equal width and shall be jointed with a tongue and groove joint with
chamfered edges glued together and reinforced with metal dowels.

11.2.6. TEAK WOOD GLAZED SHUTTERS:

The specifications for teak wood panelled shutter shall generally apply to glazed shutters for
frame, stiles etc. The sash and beading required for glazing shall be of the best teak wood
and shall be fixed as per the design shown in relevant drawing. Any mouldings, carvings
shown shall be worked out from the teak wood member of bigger size.

11.2.7. GLAZING:

Glazing shall be generally with 4mm. thick plain sheet glass/textured glass unless otherwise
mentioned in the schedule of quantities. The detailed specifications for glazing given
hereafter shall be followed generally.

11.2.8. MISCELLANEOUS:

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 131

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

Wherever mentioned in the Schedule of quantities, vision panels, venetians, plastic

laminates, push plates etc. shall be provided in all doors. The vision panels shall be of size
mentioned in the drawing and shall be provided with teak wood lipping alround the glass.
The glass shall be 4mm. thick or as specified of best quality and free from defects.

Teak wood venetians or louvers shall generally conform to relevant specifications of timber.
Necessary grooves and rebate in frames shall be provided as per drawing. Formica or
approved equivalent plastic laminate of required design, required shade and colour shall be
provided and fixed on flush door to the required size on any side of the shutter as shown in
drawing. It shall be fixed with Fevicol or any other approved adhesive. Fixing shall be done in
such a way that there shall not be any air gap, warpage or undulations on the surface.
Finished surface of shutters shall be cleaned with wax polish. The shutters shall be painted
on commercial facing side with two coats of synthetic/flat oil paint of approved shade and
make over an approved coat of primer. The decorative veneer side of the shutter shall be
wax or French polished with two or more coats so as to render a satisfactory surface. The
flush doors shall be single leaf or double leaf type as mentioned in the schedule of
quantities. In case of double leaf shutters, the meeting of the stiles shall be rebated 20mm.
and shall be either splayed or square type and the T.W. lipping around the meeting shall not
be less than 35mm. deep. The meeting stiles shall be in single piece. Sufficient care shall be
taken to prevent any damage and loss of shape during handling, transporting, stacking,
fixing etc. The door shutters shall be handled with utmost care to prevent any surface
damage, warping etc.

11.2.9. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

The work covered under the respective items in schedule and the above specifications shall
be measured as follows:

The cubic contents for wood work shall be measured for the finished size, limiting to those
shown in the drawings or ordered by the Client/PMC. The cross sectional dimensions shall
be measured equivalent to nearest enclosing rectangle (least rectangle/square) for wrought
and planed sizes. The cubical content shall be worked out correct up to three places of
decimals of a cubic metre. The frames embedded below finished floor shall not be
measured. The square metre areas for shutters shall be measured for the exposed surfaces
of shutter between frames from inside or outside whichever is more. The linear dimensions
shall be measured upto two places of decimals of a metre. The area for payment shall be
worked out correct upto two places of decimals of a square metre. The rate for shutters
shall include:

i) Cost of supply assembly and erecting in position.

ii) Cost of polishing, painting, supplying wood preservative, screws, nails, hold fasts
etc.

iii) Cost of labour for making adjustments in frames, if required, shutters and also for
fixing required fittings and fixtures.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 132

 Tender for Civil, Structural and Architectural works
Section-2-Technical Specifications

iv) In case of flush doors, the rate for individual item mentioned in the schedule of
quantities shall include cost of shutters, labour for provision of glass for vision panel,
plastic laminate sheet push plate, teak wood louvers etc., transporting charges and
labour for fixing of fixtures and fastenings except fixing of door closers and painting
and polishing as specified.

MediSys Project Consultants Pvt. Ltd Page 133

11.3. SPECIFICATIONS FOR FITTINGS AND FIXTURES:

11.3.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

The work covered under these specifications consist of supplying different types of fittings
and fixtures required for doors, windows, ventilators etc. The supply shall be in accordance
with the specification, drawings / approved samples. Samples of various fittings and fixtures
proposed to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted by the contractor for approval
of the Client/PMC before order for bulk supply is placed.

11.3.2. GENERAL:

All fittings and fixtures shall conform to relevant IS code and made of brass, anodised
aluminium, iron oxidised (M.S.) or as specified. These shall be well made reasonably smooth
and free from sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be counter
sunk to suit the heads of the specified screws. All hinges pins shall be of steel for brass
hinges and aluminium alloy NR-6 or steel pins for aluminium hinges with nylon washers or
as specified. All riveted heads pertaining to hinge pins shall be well formed. Screws supplied
for fittings shall be of the same metal and finish as the fittings. However brass cadmium
plated/chromium plated screws shall be supplied with aluminium fittings. Samples of each
fixture/ fitting shall be furnished by the contractor for approval of the Client/PMC. Order for
procurement of fittings and fixtures in bulk shall be placed only after approval by the
Client/PMC.

The fittings and fixtures to be incorporated in the work shall be strictly according to the
approved sample. Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawing and as
directed by the Client/PMC. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be.
Screws shall be driven home with a screwdriver and not hammered in. Recess shall be cut to
the exact size and depth for the counter sinking of hinges. The fittings and fixtures shall be
fixed in a workman like manner and any damages done either to fittings and fixtures or to
the shutter frames etc. should be rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Fittings shall be
of Mild steel, Stainless steel, aluminium, brass or as specified. The fittings shall be well
made, smooth, and free from sharp edges and corners, flaws and other defects. Mild steel
fittings shall be bright satin finish black stone enamelled or copper oxidised (black finish),
nickel chromium plated or as specified. Brass fittings shall be finished bright satin finish or
nickel chromium plated or copper oxidised or as specified. Aluminium fittings shall be
anodised to natural matt finish or dyed anodic coating less than grade AC 10 of IS: 1868
Stainless steel fittings shall be non-magnetic, rust & moisture proof, strong & sturdy. Pin of
hinges shall also be of stainless steel.

11.3.3. BUTT HINGES:

Brass and aluminium hinges shall be manufactured from the extruded sections and shall be
free from cracks and other defects. MS/SS butt hinges shall be cranked and manufactured
from sheets. All butt hinges shall conform to latest I.S.specifications butt hinges shall
generally confirm to I.S viz IS:1341 (M.S.) IS:205 (Cast brass & aluminium, IS:362 (Parliament
hinges); IS:453 sprig hinges, IS:3818 (Piano hinges) etc. The size of butt hinges shall be taken
as the length of the hinge. Width of the hinge shall be measured from the centre line of
hinge pin to end of flange.
11.3.4. PARLIAMENTARY HINGES:

These shall be manufactured from extruded section for brass and aluminium and from M.S.
sheets for iron oxidised and shall be free from cracks and other defects. The size of the
 parliamentary hinges shall be taken as the width between open flanges, while the depth
shall be as specified.

11.3.5. PIANO HINGES:

These shall be generally conformed to I.S.3818 and shall be made of either brass oxidized,
aluminium anodized, iron oxidized (M.S.) or as specified. Piano hinges shall be fixed in the
entire length of the cupboard shutters in a single piece. No joints shall be allowed.

11.3.6. TOWER BOLTS:

These shall generally conform to IS:204 (Part II & I). They shall be well made and shall be
free from defects.

The tower bolts shall be of the following types:

i) MS semi barrel tower bolt with ms sheet pressed barrel and G.I. bolt or with ms
barrel and ms Sheet bolt.

ii) Oxidised brass barrel tower bolt with brass sheet barrel and rolled or drawn brass
bolt.

iii) Anodised aluminium tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of
aluminium alloy.

In case of M.S. tower bolt plates and straps after assembly shall be firmly riveted or spot
welded properly.

The knobs of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed into the knob firmly as per
I.S.specifications. The tower bolt shall be finished to correct shape and pattern so as to have
a smooth action. Wherever specified, aluminium barrel tower bolts shall be manufactured
from extruded sections of barrel & bolts.

Knobs shall be properly screwed to the bolt and riveted at the back. The size of the tower
bolt shall be taken as the length of barrel without top socket.

11.3.7. DOOR LATCH:

This shall be of MS, cast brass or as specified shall have smooth sliding action. MS Latch shall
be copper oxidised (black finish) or as specified. Brass Latch shall be finished bright, CP or
oxidised or as specified

11.3.8. ALDROPS:

These shall be oxidized brass or anodized aluminium, iron oxidized or as specified and shall
be capable of smooth sliding action and shall be as per relevant I.S.Brass sliding door bolt
(aldrop) shall be made from rolled brass generally confirming to IS : 2681. M.S. sliding door
bolt shall generally conform to I.S.281. The hasp shall be of cast brass and screwed to the
bolt in a workman like manner. Alternatively the hasp and the bolt may be in one piece.
Bolts shall be finished to shape and threaded with worth standard and provided with round
brass washers and nuts of square or hexagonal shape. All components shall be smooth and
polished. The leading dimensions of aldrop shall be as the length of the bolt and specified
diametre.
11.3.9. DOOR HANDLES- BOW/PLATE HANDLES:

These should generally conform to IS : 208. Unless otherwise specified door handles shall be
of 100mm size & windows handles of 75mm size. These shall be of cast brass of specified
size, shape and pattern as approved by the Client/PMC. All edges and corners shall be
finished smooth and correct to shape and dimensions. Brass handles shall be finished bright,
chromium plated or oxidized as specified. Anodized aluminium or iron oxidized (m.s.)
handles shall be of specified size, shape and pattern. The size of the handle is taken as the
inside grip of the handle. In case of iron oxidized handles, the same shall be manufactured
from m.s. sheet pressed into oval section as per I.S.

11.3.10. MORTISE LOCK & LATCH:

This should generally conform to I.S.2209. Handles shall conform to IS:4992. Mortise lock
with latches and a pair of level handles shall be 6 levers, with zinc alloy pressure die
cast/brass or as specified body of approved quality, and shall be right or left handed as
specified. The pair of handles shall be either brass chromium plated or anodized aluminium
of approved shape and pattern or as specified. It shall be of the best Indian make of
approved quality. The size of the lock shall be determined by its length. The lock for single
leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf door a rebated face. Level handles
with springs shall be mounted on plates and shall be of approved quality, anodized
aluminium or as specified.

11.3.11. HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER:

This shall be generally conform to IS:3564. Hydraulic door closer shall be of approved quality
and make. The operation of the Hydraulic door closer shall be very smooth. This should be
of H.D.-66 for external/main doors and elegant-63 for all internal doors.

The overall height should not be more than 170mm. for H.D.-66 and 160mm. for elegant-63,
base shall be 110 x 60mm. for H.D.-66 and 100 x 55mm. for elegant - 63 weighing not less
than 4.5 kg. for H.D.-66 and 4 Kg. for elegant - 63. Speed of the Hydraulic door closer shall
be adjustable and latch closing also shall be adjustable type. Suspension and lubrication of
door closer shall be in perfect line and level.

11.3.12. The contractor shall provide for all the incidentals required for fixing these fixtures and
fittings such as cadmium plated screws etc. Fittings and fixtures shall be fixed securely in a
workman like manner all as directed by the Client/PMC. Any of the fixtures damaged during
the fixing shall be removed and new one fixed in their place and the surface of joinery made
good where affected, at his own expense. Mortise plates shall be used over holes where the
bolts enter in the wood work. Metal sockets shall be provided to all bolts where the shoot
 enter brick, stone, concrete etc. The incidental Fixtures like mortise plates, metal sockets,
screws etc. shall not be paid for separately.

11.3.13 MORTICE NIGHT LATCH:

This is a mortise lock having a single spring bolt withdrawn from the outside by using the key
and from inside by turning the knob and with an arrangement whereby the lock can be
prevented from being opened by its key from outside while the night latch is used from
inside the room. This should generally conform to IS:3847. It shall be cast or sheet brass, cast
or sheet aluminium alloy or mild steel as specified and of approved make. These shall be
bright finished or copper oxidized (black) finish as specified. Normal size of the latch shall be
denoted by the length of the face over the body in millimetres.

11.3.14. FLOOR DOOR STOPPER:

The floor door stopper shall conform to IS:1823. This shall be made of cast brass of overall
size as specified and shall have rubber cushion. The shape and pattern of stopper shall be
approved by the Client/PMC. It shall be of brass finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized
or as specified. The size of door stopper shall be determined by the length of its plate. The
body of the door stopper shall be cast in one piece. All parts of the door stopper shall be of
good workmanship and finish and free from surface and casting defects. Aluminium stopper
shall have anodic coating of not less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868.

11.3.15. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

All the fittings with all the necessary accessories shall be measured in numbers and the rate
shall include the cost of all materials including taxes, excise duty, if any, loading, unloading,
transporting, cost of screws, bolts and other accessories complete, if the same are not to be
paid for separately as per schedule of quantities.

11.4. SPECIFICATIONS FOR GLASS AND GLAZING:

11.4.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

The works covered by this specification include furnishing and fixing the glass panes to teak
wood or steel doors and windows, strictly in accordance with these specifications and
drawings.

11.4.2. Materials:

11.4.2.1. Glass:

The glass shall be special selected/selected ordinary quantity of approved make, as specified
and it shall be free from bubbles, flaws specks, waves, air holes, distortion, scratches or other
defects. The glasses in bulk quantities shall be brought to site in Makers original packings and
Makers guarantee shall be produced if called for by the Client/PMC. The glass shall be of
required thickness as mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and/or drawing or as
directed by the Client/PMC. The contractor shall submit the sample of the glass which he
proposes to use on the work and only such approved quality of glass shall be used in the
works. The glass brought to site shall be protected against damages. Wherever
frosted (obscure) glass is mentioned in the item of schedule of quantities and/or shown in
drawings, the glass shall be of sand blown pattern and shall also be got approved by the
Client/PMC.
11.4.2.2. Beading:

The beading shall be of teak wood of superior quality timber in case of teak wood doors and
windows and/or required sizes mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and/or
shown in drawing. In case of steel doors and windows, the beading shall be anodized
aluminium beading of channel section as per sizes mentioned in the item and/or shown in
the drawing. The junction of the beadings shall be miter jointed.

11.4.3. The glass shall be cut to the required sizes of panels where it is to be fitted, and it shall be so
cut that it fits properly in the frames without rattling. Pre-measurement of each panel prior
to the cutting of glass is essential.

The beading shall then be fixed to glass panes and screwed at close intervals not more than
10 cm. from each corner and the intermediate not more than 20 cm. apart. When glass
panes are fixed with wooden beadings having mitered joints or aluminium beading thin layer
of glazier putty shall be applied covering the area in contact between the glass and sash bars
and beadings. In case of louvers, all the exposed edges of the glass shall be ground properly.

11.4.4. GENERAL:

After the inspection is over and permitted by the Client/PMC, glass panes shall be cleaned off
any labels, paints smears and spots and shall be washed from both the sides and all glazing
left clear, perfect and free from rattling. The contractor shall provide all the scaffolding, tools
and plants for fixing the glass panes at his own cost. In case of steel windows, any hardware
if fixed in position, shall be removed temporarily before fixing the glass panes and which
shall be re fixed back in position, all at the contractors cost.

11.4.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

The rate for teak wood door/window shutters and/or steel door/window shall normally
cover the cost of glass and glazing also, unless otherwise mentioned. In case the glazing is
carried out as a separate item, the measurement shall be taken out to cut size of teak
wood/steel door/window frames forming the sides of glass panes and area calculated to two
places of decimal of a square metre. The rate shall include the cost of supplying and fixing
the glass panes, all materials, labour, transport, scaffolding etc.

11.5. SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS AND WALL SPANS:

11.5.1. SCOPE:

The work covered under this specification consist of fabricating, supplying and installing in
position aluminium glazed doors and wall spans in strict accordance with these specifications
and drawings.

11.5.2. APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS:

 The relevant I.S. specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of steel and aluminium
doors, windows and ventilators.
2. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil (Part-VIII)
engineering works.
3. IS:1868 Specification for anodic coating on aluminium and its alloys.
4. IS:1948 Specifications for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
5. IS:2835 Transparent sheet glass for glazing and framing purposes.
6. IS:5523 Method of testing anodic coating on aluminium and its alloys

11.5.3. GENERAL:

11.5.3.1. The contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabrication and erection for approval of the
Client/PMC.

11.5.3.2. No fabrication work shall be undertaken prior to the approval of the Client/PMC.

11.5.3.3. The contractor shall submit samples of all materials/ aluminium sections to be used for
manufacturing of doors and wall spans for approval of the Client/PMC before bulk
procurement.

11.5.4. MATERIALS:

11.5.4.1. The frames of all the doors and wall spans shall be fabricated from extruded aluminium
sections of standard INDAL/ JINDAL or other approved equivalent sections.

11.5.4.2. Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture for extruded sections for this work shall correspond
to I.S.733 and shall be anodized before incorporating in the work. The rate quoted for these
items is deemed to include the cost of anodizing also.

11.5.4.3. The frame work, style, mullions, beadings, transom and handles etc. shall be of aluminium
anodized sections as shown in the detailed drawings.

11.5.4.4. All extruded sections shall have minimum anodic film (natural matt finish) of thickness not
less than 25microns.

11.5.4.5. Stainless steel or Cadmium plated brass counter sunk screws, nuts, bolts, washers rivets and
other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless
steel as specified in the drawing.

11.5.4.6. Each door leaf shall be prepared to receive glass panel of required thickness of special
selected quality of Hindustan Pilkington or other approved equivalent as specified in the
schedule.

11.5.4.7. Glazing shall be done with neoprene dry set glazing gasket of best quality and approved
make with snap-in beveled white anodized matt aluminium metal glazing stops inside and
outside.
11.5.4.8. 8All doors shall have offset pivots, double action floor springs (180 degree minimum swing)
with oil check of approved manufacture embedded in floor automatic door closer sunk flush.

11.5.4.9. One concealed mortise lock of 6-lever on one style of each shutter concealed as per
manufacturer’s design with concealed flush bolt shall be provided.

11.5.4.10. All doors shall have push plates of design shown in the drawing and as described in item of
schedule.

11.5.4.11. All the doors shall be without thresholds.

11.5.4.12. All aluminium surfaces in contact with masonry or concrete shall be given a heavy coat of
bitumastic paint.

11.5.4.13. After fabrication aluminium metal shall be protected from construction hazards that may
damage their appearance or finish therefore all exposed surfaces of all aluminium members
shall be protected by masking tape during the shipment and erection.

11.5.5. FABRICATION:

11.5.5.1. The frames shall be square and flat and the corners of the frame shall be fabricated to a true
right angle. All the fixed, sliding, opening frames shall be fabricated with sections which have
been cut to length mitered and mechanically fixed at the corners.

11.5.5.2. In case welded joints are used anodizing shall be done after fabrication as a whole unit is
completed. All welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting,
discolouration of other surfaces, imperfection after fixing etc.

11.5.5.3. Necessary allowances shall be made while manufacturing the door frames and wall spans for
receiving plaster.

11.5.5.4. Thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be
applied on the finished sections of the aluminium work by the supplier to protect the
surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirt, dust etc. during installation.

11.5.6. Hardware:

11.5.6.1. All cut-outs, recesses, mortising or milling operations required for fixing the hardware shall
be accurately made reinforced with backing plate as required to ensure adequate strength of
the connection.

11.5.6.2. All the hardware, accessories shall be of best approved types and of anodized finish same as
for the frames and other sections.

11.5.6.3. The contractor shall guarantee for all hardware that they shall remain free from defects of
any kind of material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of delivery.

11.5.6.4. The contractor shall repair or replace any and all defective work and damage caused thereby
at any time or times during that period within 3days from the written notice. This shall be
done without any cost to the Client and to the complete satisfaction of the Client/PMC.
11.5.6.5. In case the same are not replaced immediately after the receipt of the notice the Client shall
do so at the cost of the contractors. The cost as certified by the Client/PMC shall be final and
binding on the contractors.

11.5.6.6. Each lock shall be supplied with 2 keys and each keys shall be with the numbers stamped
thereon according to the door numbers, where it is installed.

11.5.6.7. All hardware shall be free from defects which may affect appearance and serviceability.

11.5.6.8. All hardware shall be fixed after obtaining the prior approval of the Client/PMC.

11.5.6.9. Approved samples of hardware shall be kept in the custody of the Client/PMC. Working and
moving parts of lock sets shall be accurately fitted to smooth, close bearings and shall be free
from rattle.

11.5.7. FIXING IN POSITION:

11.5.7.1. The frames shall be accurately fixed to the flooring/ brick masonry or concrete member.

11.5.7.2. The fixing of the frame shall be done with stainless steel or cadmium plated brass counter
sunk screws driven onto the teak wood rough grounds already fixed to the wall with
holdfasts.

11.5.7.3. The screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastenings, devices shall be
of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless steel as specified in the drawings or as
directed by the Client/PMC.

11.5.7.4. No field fabrication of the frame shall be permitted. All aluminium and glazing work shall be
fixed in position as per relevant Indian standard specifications and code of practices.

11.5.7.5. All joints between metal and masonry shall be fully caulked with mastic in order to ensure
water tightness.

11.5.7.6. The joints shall be neatly pointed with matching cement and excess material shall be
removed.

11.5.7.7. All hardware shall be fixed in workmanship like manner and as directed by the Client/PMC.

11.5.8. GLAZING WORK:

11.5.8.1. The glazing shall be done with Hindustan Pilkington make or other equivalent approved sheet
glass of special selected quality and of thickness as specified.

11.5.8.2. The glazing shall be either transparent or ground or figured as specified in the drawing or as
directed by Client/PMC.

11.5.8.3. All glazing shall be either transparent or ground or figured as specified in the drawing or as
directed by Client/PMC.

11.5.8.4. The glass shall be cut so as to give a clearance of not more than 1.5 mm alround the frames.

11.5.8.5. All the glass panels shall have properly squared corners and straight edges.
11.5.8.6. The glass panels shall be fixed to the frame with approved neoprene dry-set glazing gaskets
of best quality and approved make with shape-in beveled white anodized matt finished
aluminium metal glazing stops inside and out.

11.5.8.7. The glass panels shall be fixed firmly and truly parallel to the plane of frame.

11.5.8.8. All damages or breakages during glazing shall be at the contractor’s own risk and cost till the
work is fully accepted and taken over by the Client/PMC.

11.5.8.9. All the doors and wall-spans/ fixed glazing shall be tested for water tightness. Any leakages
found during testing, it is the responsibility of the contractor to rectify the same without any
extra claim.

11.5.9. ALUMINIUM GLAZED SLIDING DOOR:

11.5.9.1. The aluminium sliding door unit including accessories shall be of size specified in item of
schedule and as shown in the drawing.

11.5.9.2. The sliding door unit shall have double leaves of sliding shutter including all accessories as
per manufacturer’s specifications along with the following essential components:

11.5.9.2.1. Automatic sliding door aluminium operator weighing (approximately) 28 kg and suitable for
the opening shown in drawing.
11.5.9.2.2. Micro computer control unit extremely smooth, silent and consistent in operation.

11.5.9.2.3. Two numbers of micro wave sensors for transmission of the signal of person or object
approaching the door to micro computer.

11.5.9.2.4. High power motor unit with protection device against over loading etc.

11.5.9.2.5. 5All other accessories like floor guide, side channels, belt with its adjuster, door brackets,
terminal block, aluminium channel, door adjuster, closing and opening stoppers, driving and
idler pullies, spring etc.

11.5.9.2.6. The door unit shall have automatically pilot test facility.

11.5.9.3. It shall be contractor’s full responsibility to get approved the whole fabricated unit by the
Client/PMC before its delivery to work site.

11.5.9.4. The following door unit shall be guaranteed against manufacturing defects for a period of
eighteen months from the date of installation and commissioning.

11.5.9.5. The contractor shall replace/ repair any defective component or whole unit immediately
after receipt of written intimation from the Client/PMC during guarantee period. No extra
claim shall be entertained for such replacement or repairs.

11.5.9.6. The specifications regarding all materials like aluminium sections, glazing etc. and fabrication
mentioned above for aluminium glazed door & wall spans shall hold good for aluminium
sliding door unit also.

11.5.10. MODE OF MESUREMENTS:

11.5.10.1. The unit of measurement shall be Kg or as specified in the item for all types of doors and wall
spans.

11.5.10.2. The rate of aluminium automatic sliding door unit includes the cost of all materials,
accessories, labour for fabrication, packing charges and transportation, installation and
commissioning, all types of taxes and levies.

11.6. SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINIUM GLAZED & LOUVERED WINDOWS:

11.6.1. The work covered under this specification consists of fabricating, supplying and installing in
position aluminium glazed and louvered windows in strict accordance with these
specifications and drawings.

11.6.2. APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS:

The relevant I.S. specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification.

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of steel and aluminium
doors, windows and ventilators.
2. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil (Part-VIII)
engineering works.
3. IS:1868 Specification for anodic coating on aluminium and its alloys.
4. IS:1948 Specifications for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
5. IS:2835 Transparent sheet glass for glazing and framing purposes.
6. IS:5523 Method of testing anodic coating on aluminium and its alloys

11.6.3. General:

11.6.3.1. The contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabrication and erection for approval of the
Client/PMC.

11.6.3.2. No fabrication work shall be undertaken prior to the approval of the Client/PMC.

11.6.3.3. The contractor shall submit samples of all materials/ aluminium sections to be used for
manufacturing of windows and louvers for approval of the Client/PMC before bulk
procurement.

11.6.4. MATERIALS:

11.6.4.1. The frames of all the windows and louvers shall be fabricated from extruded aluminium
sections of standard INDAL/ JINDAL or other approved equivalent sections.
11.6.4.2. Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture for extruded sections for this work shall correspond
to I.S.733 and shall be anodized before incorporating in the work. The rate quoted for these
items is deemed to include the cost of anodizing also.

11.6.4.3. The frame work, mullions, beadings, transom and handles etc. shall be of aluminium
anodized sections as shown in the detailed drawings.

11.6.4.4. All extruded sections shall have minimum anodic film (natural matt finish) of thickness not
less than 25microns.

11.6.4.5. Stainless steel or Cadmium plated brass counter sunk screws, nuts, bolts, washers rivets and
other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless
steel as specified in the drawing.

11.6.4.6. Each window leaf shall be prepared to receive glass panel of required thickness of special
selected quality of Hindustan Pilkington or other approved equivalent as specified in the
schedule.
11.6.4.7. Glazing shall be done with neoprene dry set glazing gasket of best quality and approved
make with shape-in beveled white anodized matt aluminium metal glazing stops inside and
outside.

11.6.4.8. All aluminium surfaces in contact with masonry or concrete shall be given a heavy coat of
bitumastic paint.

11.6.4.9. 9After fabrication aluminium metal shall be protected from construction hazards that may
damage their appearance or finish therefore all exposed surfaces of all aluminium members
shall be protected by masking tape during the shipment and erection.

11.6.5. FABRICATION:

11.6.5.1. The frames shall be square and flat and the corners of the frame shall be fabricated to a true
right angle. All the fixed, sliding, opening frames shall be fabricated with sections which have
been cut to length mitered and mechanically fixed at the corners.

11.6.5.2. In case welded joints are used anodizing shall be done after fabrication as a whole unit is
completed. All welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting, discoloration
of other surfaces, imperfection after fixing etc.

11.6.5.3. Necessary allowances shall be made while manufacturing the frames of windows and louvers
for receiving plaster.

11.6.5.4. Thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be
applied on the finished sections of the aluminium work by the supplier to protect the
surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirt, dust etc. during installation.

11.6.5.5. The frame work for louvered windows shall be of aluminium box sections as specified in the
item of work and drawings. The louvered frame shall be rigidly fixed in the masonry or
concrete with adequate holdfasts, anchors plates etc. in true plumb, line and level as per
drawing.

11.6.5.6. The aluminium louvers shall be fabricated out of aluminium sheets of specified gauge and
pressed to the required shape as shown in the detailed drawing.
11.6.5.7. The pressed aluminium louvers of required shape shall be fixed to frame work in proper
inclination with necessary screws, nuts, bolts, cleats, etc. as shown in drawing or as directed
by Client/PMC.

11.6.6. Hardware:

11.6.6.1. All the hardware, accessories shall be of best approved types and of anodized finish same as
for the frames and other sections.

11.6.6.2. The contractor shall guarantee for all hardware that they shall remain free from defects of
any kind of material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of delivery.

11.6.6.3. The contractor shall repair or replace any and all defective work and damage caused thereby
at any time or times during that period within 3days from the written notice. This shall be
done without any cost to the Client and to the complete satisfaction of the Client/PMC.

11.6.6.4. In case the same are not replaced immediately after the receipt of the notice, the Client shall
do so at the cost of the contractors. The cost as certified by the Client/PMC shall be final and
binding on the contractors.

11.6.6.5. All hardware shall be free from defects which may affect appearance and serviceability.

11.6.6.6. All hardware shall be fixed after obtaining the prior approval of the Client/PMC.

11.6.6.7. Approved samples of hardware shall be kept in the custody of the Client/PMC. Working and
moving parts of the windows shall be accurately fitted to smooth, close bearings and shall be
free from rattle.

11.6.7. FIXING IN POSITION:

11.6.7.1. The frames shall be accurately fixed to the brick masonry or concrete member in accordance
with I.S.1081.

11.6.7.2. The fixing of the frame shall be done with cadmium plated brass counter sunk screws driven
onto the teak wood rough grounds already fixed to the wall with holdfasts.

11.6.7.3. The screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastenings, devices shall be
of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless steel as specified in the drawings or as
directed by the Client/PMC.

11.6.7.4. No field fabrication of the frame shall be permitted. All aluminium and glazing work shall be
fixed in position as per relevant Indian standard specifications and code of practices.

11.6.7.5. All joints between metal and masonry shall be fully caulked with mastic in order to ensure
water tightness.

11.6.7.6. The joints shall be neatly pointed with matching cement and excess material shall be
removed.

11.6.7.7. All hardware shall be fixed in workmanship like manner and as directed by the Client/PMC.

11.6.7.8. The protective film of lacquer wherever provided shall be well preserved and the contractor
further shall take all precautions to protect the windows from wet cement, lime, dirt, mortar,
dust etc. by suitably covering them during plastering work.
11.6.8. GLAZING WORK:

11.6.8.1. The glazing shall be done with Hindustan Pilkington make or other equivalent approved sheet
glass of special selected quality and of thickness as specified.

11.6.8.2. The glazing shall be uniform in appearance and free from flaws, specks, scratches, air
bubbles, cracks, strains and other defects.

11.6.8.3. All glazing shall be either transparent or ground or figured as specified in the drawing or as
directed by Client/PMC.

11.6.8.4. The glass shall be cut so as to give a clearance of not more than 1.5 mm alround the frames.

11.6.8.5. All the glass panels shall have properly squared corners and straight edges.

11.6.8.6. The glass panels shall be fixed to the frame with approved neoprene dry-set glazing gaskets
of best quality and approved make with shape-in beveled white anodized matt finished
aluminium metal glazing stops inside and out.

11.6.8.7. The glass panels shall be fixed firmly and truly parallel to the plane of frames.

11.6.8.8. All damages or breakages during glazing shall be at the contractor’s own risk and cost till the
work is fully accepted and taken over by the Client/PMC.

11.6.8.9. All the windows and fixed glazing shall be tested for water tightness. Any leakages found
during testing, it is the responsibility of the contractor to rectify the same without any extra
claim.

11.6.8.10. The contractor shall also remove all lacquer paint and PVC cover and clean the windows
thoroughly before handling over them to the Client/PMC.

11.6.8.11. MODE OF MESUREMENTS:

The unit of measurement shall be in sqmt or as specified in the item.

11.7. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROLLING SHUTTERS:

11.7.1. SCOPE OF WORK & GENERAL:

The work covered under this specification consists of fabricating, supplying and installing in
position the rolling shutters of size and type as specified in the description of item in strict
accordance with these specifications and drawings.

11.7.2. MATERIALS:

Rolling shutters complete with accessories shall be of approved quality and as specified.
These shall be suitable for fixing in position as specified i.e. outside or inside; on or below
lintel or between jambs of the opening. Rolling shutter shall be hand/gear operated as
specified in the item of schedule of quantities. For hand operated shutters, it shall be push
and pull type. For gear operated shutters, it shall be provided with reduction gear operated
by mechanical device with chain, crank, shaft and handle. The shutter shall consist of 80 wide
m.s. laths 1.25mm. thick or gauge as specified of best quality mild steel sheet machine rolled.
Laths shall be inter locked together throughout their entire length and jointed together at
 the end with end locks. These shall be mounted on specially designed pipe shaft. The spring
shall be of best quality and shall be manufactured from the tested tensile spring steel wire or
strip of adequate strength to balance the shutter in all positions. The spring, pipe shaft etc.
shall be supported on strong mild steel or malleable cast iron brackets. Both the side guides
and bottom rails shall be joint less and of single piece of pressed steel of minimum 16 gauge
thickness. The top cover of shaft, spring etc. shall be of the same materials as that of lath. No
extra payment shall be made for the hood, brackets etc. to cover the shaft etc. The reduction
gear arrangement operated by the mechanical device shall be of the best quality and shall be
easy in operation.

11.7.3. FIXING:

Brackets shall be fixed on the lintel/beam or under the lintel/beam as specified in item with
rawl plugs and screws, bolts, washers etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed
on the brackets. The lath portion (shutters) shall be laid on ground and the side guide
channels shall be bound with it. The shutter shall then be placed in position. The side guide
channels shall be fixed to the wall through the plates welded to the guides. These plates and
brackets shall be fixed by means of steel screws, bolts and rawl plugs drilled into the wall.
The plates and screws, bolts shall be concealed in plaster to make their locations invisible.
Fixing shall be done accurately in a workman like manner that the operation of the shutter is
easy and smooth. All grout holes and damages on the wall while fixing of shutters shall be
made good by the contractor at no extra cost to the Client. The contractor shall ensure
smooth and easy working of shutters. All the members of the rolling shutter shall be
thoroughly cleaned off dust, scales, rust etc. and shall be given approved priming coat of red
oxide paint before fixing the shutter in position and then shall be painted with two coats of
flat/synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.

11.7.4. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

The area of rolling shutters shall be measured in square metre correct up to two places of
decimal. Width and height shall be taken for net opening correct to a centimeter.

11.8. SPECIFICATIONS FOR M. S. GRILLS AND HANDRAILS:

11.8.1. SCOPE:

The work covered under this specification consists of fabricating, supplying and installing in
position the ms grills and ms handrails for staircase of size, type and finish as specified in the
description of item in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings.

11.8.2. GENERAL:

The contractor shall submit 6copies of shop drawings covering all types of work under these
specifications before manufacture. The drawing shall show all dimensions, details of
construction, installation relating to the adjoining work.

11.8.3. MATERIALS:

All structural steel shall conform to I.S.226 sections for grills, handrails and shall be free from
loose mill scales, rusts, pitting or any other defects affecting its strength and durability.
11.8.4. FABRICATION:

11.8.4.1. The grill and the handrails shall be fabricated to the design and pattern shown in the
drawings. All joints shall be made in best workman like manner with slotting and welding as
required to the specified size and shape. The edge of the M.S. flats shall be suitably mitered
before welding to get the desired shape. The joints shall be filled to remove excess stay after
welding. Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and any other miscellaneous fastenings, devices
shall be of steel and shall be provided by the contractor.

11.8.4.2. Manufactured M.S. grills and handrails and then be fixed in between the posts, balusters,
M.S. frame work etc. to correct alignment. Any undulations, bends etc; found shall be
rectified by the contractor at his own cost. The complete assembly of grill/railing so fixed
shall be firm and there shall not be any lateral movements.

11.8.5. SAMPLES:

Samples of grill and railings shall be submitted for approval of the Client/PMC and to be got
approved before taking up for mass fabrication.

11.8.6. INSTALLATION:

The approved grills shall be fixed in position where specified and shown in drawings including
in masonry walls, teakwood frames, hand railings etc. Any damages to walls, frames etc.
caused during fixing the grills shall be made good by grouting with cement
mortar/packing/repairing properly at the contractors cost.

11.8.7. PAINTING:

Painting shall be done as per the specifications specified under painting or as specified in the
BOQ.

11.8.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

11.8.8.1. Actual weight of M.S. grill manufactured and fixed in position shall only be measured in kgs
for payment. All measurements shall be taken to two places of decimal of kilograms. The
rate is to include the cost of all materials, labour, transporting, fabricating, installing and
scaffolding if necessary, grouting etc. complete.

11.8.8.2. The MS hand rail shall be measured for payment in running metre. The length shall be
measured along the top centre line of the hand rail and shall be measured between ends of
balusters, newels, posts as the case may be up to two places of decimals of a metre. Rate
shall include fabrication, leaving suitable pockets, grouting the same, fixing, all labour,
materials, transport, painting, finishing and scaffolding if necessary.

11.9. SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL DOORS:

11.9.1. SCOPE:

11.9.1.1 This specification covers the design, supply of materials; fabrication and installation of
factory made special type of approved make steel flush fire doors and general purpose steel
flush doors with all accessories and including supply and installation of hardwares as
specified in the boq.
11.9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

11.9.2.1 The scope includes supply of all materials, labour cost, equipments, tools & tackles,
scaffolding etc; which are necessary to complete all works for supply and installation of steel
doors as per drawings, schedule of specification and BOQ. The scope also includes the
fasteners, features and any other items not specifically mentioned, but which are necessary
to make a complete the installation and operation of the door is part of this contract.

11.9.2.2 All metal work shall be free from defects, impairing strength, durability and appearance and
shall be of the best quality for purposes specified made with structural properties to
withstand safely strains, stresses to which they shall normally be subjected to.

11.9.2.3 All fittings shall be of high quality and as specified and as per approval of Client/PMC.

11.9.2.4 Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the Client/PMC,
shall not relieve the Contractor from their responsibility and obligation regarding the
correctness, completeness, safety, quality and workmanship, etc.

11.9.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

The relevant I.S. specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification. However, the applicable standards and codes shall be as per but not limited to
the list given below:

IS:277 Galvanised steel sheet (Plain and corrugated)

IS:3614 Metallic and non-metallic fire check doors – Resistance test and Part-2
performance criteria.

11.9.4 HOLLOW METAL FIRE DOOR WITH HONEY COMB CORE

11.9.4.1 Fire door shall be 2hour fire rated and door quality shall be approved by TAC/CBRI and tested
conformed to IS:3614. The door should meet the requirements of Tariff Advisory Committee
(TAC).

11.9.4.2 Fire door frame:

The door Frames are to be manufactured from 1.60mm (16gauge) galvanised steel sheets
complying with latest IS:277. The profile of the door frame is double rebated and size of
143mmx57mm (+/- 0.3) with bending radius of 1.4mm. The Frames are fabricated at factory
shall be in knock down form with butt joints for bolted assembly at site. The frames are to be
provided with 3mm thick back plates on all jambs with provision for anchor bolt fixing to wall
openings. All frames to have reinforcement pads for fixing of door closer, at appropriate
location as per manufacturer’s details and shop drawings. The frames are provided with
factory finish-pre-punched cut outs to receive specific hardware and iron mongery.

The frames are to be provided with hinge plates 3mm thick pre -drilled to receive hinges for
screw mounted fixing. All cut outs including hinge plates, strike plates to have mortar guard
covers from inside to prevent cement, dust ingress into cut outs at the time of grouting. The
frames to have rubber shutter silencer on strike jambs for single shutter frames and on the
head jambs for double shutter frames.

The surfaces of the door frames are to be cleaned with solvents and etch primered for
receiving primer and top coats. Door frames are to be primered in zinc phosphate stoving
 primer (35microns DFT) . Door frames to be finished in thermo setting paint (35microns DFT)
of approved colour and make as specified by the Client/PMC.

11.9.4.3 Fire door shutter:

The door shutters are to be manufactured from 1.25mm (18gauge) galvanized steel sheets
complying with latest IS:277. The door shutters are to be press formed to 46mm thick double
skin hollow door with lock seam joints at stile edges. The shutters are to have (not visible)
screws or fasteners on both face and internal reinforcement to be provided at top, bottom
and stile edges for desired fire rating.

The Door shutters are provided with honeycomb paper core to be bounded to the inner
faces of the shutter. The shutters are to be factory prepared with pre-punched cutouts and
reinforcements to receive iron mongery as per final finish hardware schedule. The shutter
should have an interlocking arrangement at this stile edges for flat surface on either side.
The shutters are to have pre-drilled hinge plates with hinge guard covers. Shutters with locks
to have concealed lock box with lock fixing brackets with pre -taped holes. The door closer
reinforcement pads to be provided at appropriate location as per manufacturer’s design. All
iron mongery preparation to have adequate reinforcement for flushes fixing at site.

Vision panel are to be provided with Borosilicate clear float glass of the thickness 6mm for
upto two hours fire rating. Glass to be fixed with clip on frames for square and rectangular
vision panels and with spin turned rings for circular vision panels. Unless otherwise specified,
standard sizes are 200mmx200mm, and 380mm diameter.

Finish: The shutters are to be suitably cleaned with solvents and etch primered for receiving
primer and top coats. Shutters to be primered in zinc phosphate stoving primer (35microns
DFT). The shutters are to be finished in thermo setting paint (35microns DFT) of approved
colour and make as specified by Client/PMC.

11.9.4.4 PACKING:

Frame: Individual frame members are to be wrapped in polythene sheets and placed in
individual card board boxes. Individual boxes to be sealed. Frames are to be assembled at
site with the aid of roofing bolts.

Shutters: Shutters to be wrapped in polyethene sheets and further packed in card board and
duly strapped. All frames and shutters duly marked as per door schedule for easy
identification at site.

11.9.4.5 STORAGE

All knocked down frames shall be stacked flat and shutters vertically on wooden runners and
suitably covered as per the instructions of manufacturer to prevent rust and damage.

11.9.4.6 INSTALLATION

11.9.4.6.1 Door frame fixing

 The door frames should be assembled adjacent to the place of installation as the frames are
not designed for transporting in an assembled condition. After assembly it is to be ensured
that all threaded preparations are covered from the back of the frame using 15x10 self
adhesive sponge strips to prevent penetration of mortar back- fill into screw threads. The
head member of assembled frame shall be positioned against jambs ensuring correct
alignment and secured using M8x20long plated bolts together with nuts spring and flat
washers.

The assembled frame shall be kept in position within the opening by means of bracing. In
order to correctly position the frame against finished floor level or equalize on adjustable
floor anchors where specified, shim shall be used under jambs. The frame shall be checked
for squareness, alignment, twist etc. with carpenters bevel and plumb.

A tie rod shall be fixed to the frame during installation to ensure the correct dimensions
between the frame rebates and the same may be removed after installation.

Where a 2nd fix application is required a shim detail is suggested to take up gap between
frame and existing opening.

Existing masonry wall openings - Metal expansion shields

Mark all positions of fixings on wall. Remove the frame and drill wall to appropriate specified
size. Fit the rod anchor shells metal expansion bolts into the wall. Fit the jamb spacer bracket
into back of frame profile. Reposition the frame back into opening and realign. Lightly screw
CSK HD machine screws into shells, shim behind frame. Slowly tighten screws continually
checking plumb, square etc. Finally ensure frames are not deformed as tightened. After fixing
the frame shall be grouted with cement mortar 1:3 or Plaster of Paris or Gypsum powder as
approved. The gap between frame and wall to be closed by cement pointing using cement
mortar 1:3. Back fill the frame through holes provided and insert nylon plugs.

11.9.4.6.2 Door shutter fixing

Fix all the hardware to the door shutter like hinges, flush bolts, bolts, mortice locks, door
closer, door stoppers, handles etc. with the appropriate screws and bolts supplied. The
shutter is to be then fixed to the frame which is already installed. Align the shutter to match
the hardware to the cutouts in the frame. Tighten the hinge screws.

11.9.4.6.3 Application of ‘FLAT’ seal (for smoke check if specifically required)

Clean door jamb rebate surfaces of all dust, oil etc. Affix self-adhesive ‘FLAT’ seal on the door
frame rebates as indicated by the manufacturer on hinge jambs, strike jambs, head member
and sill.

11.9.4.7 FIRE DOOR-HARDWARE SCHEDULE:

a) Where locking/latching Mortice sash lock 50/60 mm backset. Double action

provision is required deadbolt brass / nickel finish of Dorset make. 5pin
tumbler brass cylinder 70 mm lengths. One side key
one side knob operation and Brass/Nickel lever handles
with independent escutcheon of Dorma/Geze make.
b) Where latching provision Mortice latch 50mm backset field reversible latch,
is required brass/nickel finish of Dorma/Geze make. And Brass
lever handles of Dorset make.
c) Hinges Stainless steel double bearing butt hinges 102x89x3mm
 thick. Hinge holes template drilled as per ANSI of
Dorma/Geze make.

d) Door closer Hydraulic door closer double speed pressure die cast
body with steel rack and pinion of Dorma/Geze make.

e) Flush bolts (Double Concealed steel flush bolts for fixing on inactive shutter
doors) 300mm length of Dorma/Geze.

f) Smoke seal Self adhesive EPDM smoke seal ‘FLAT’ type

(Polyethylene cross linked foam of size 2mm thick and
12.5mm width) of Monarch Make.

g) Stainless Steel “D” handle Stainless steel “D” handle 19mmx300mm length.
Through bolt fixing with estruction in satin finish of
Dorma or Geze make.

Panic Emergency exits Rim latch of advance design for single door with or
h) device without locking arrangements of Dorma or Geze make.

11.9.5 HOLLOW GENERAL PURPOSE DOORS WITH HONEYCOMB CORE

11.9.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, the door height shall be 2400mm.

11.9.5.2 The frames are to be manufactured from 1.25mm (18gauge) galvanised steel sheets
complying with latest IS:277 coating class zinc coating mill phosphatized. The profile of the
door frames are to be single rebated and size of 100mmx57mm (+/- 0.3) with bending radius
of 1.2mm. The frames are to be fabricated from 1.25mm thick galvanised steel sheet to the
specified profile and dimensions. Frames fabricated at factory shall be in knock down form
with butt joints for bolted assembly at site. The door frames are to be provided with 3mm
thick back plates on all jambs with provision for anchor bolt fixing to wall openings. All
frames to have reinforcement pads for fixing of door closer at appropriate location as per
manufacturer’s details. The Frames to have factory finish, pre-punched cut outs to receive
specific hardware and iron mongery.

The frames are to be provided with hinge plates 3mm thick pre -drilled to receive hinges for
screw mounted fixing. All cut outs including hinge plates, strike plates to have mortar guard
covers from inside to prevent cement, dust ingress into cut outs at the time of grouting. The
frames to have rubber shutter silencer on strike jambs for single shutter frames and on the
head jambs for double shutter frames.

The surfaces of the door frames are to be cleaned with solvents and etch primered for
receiving primer and top coats. Door frames are to be primered in zinc phosphate stoving
primer (35microns DFT) . Door frames to be finished in thermo setting paint (35microns DFT)
of approved colour and make as specified by the Client/PMC.

11.9.5.3 GENERAL PURPOSE DOOR SHUTTER

The door shutters are to be manufactured from 0.8mm (22gauge) galvanized steel sheets
complying with latest IS:277. The door shutters are to be press formed to 46mm thick
 double skin hollow door with lock seam joints at stile edges. The shutters are to have (not
visible) screws or fasteners on both face and internal reinforcement to be provided at top,
bottom and stile edges for desired fire rating.

The Door shutters are provided with honeycomb paper core to be bounded to the inner
faces of the shutter. The shutters are to be factory prepared with pre-punched cutouts and
reinforcements to receive iron mongery as per final finish hardware schedule. The shutter
should have an interlocking arrangement at this stile edges for flat surface on either side.
The shutters are to have pre-drilled hinge plates with hinge guard covers. Shutters with locks
to have concealed lock box with lock fixing brackets with pre-taped holes. The door

closer reinforcement pads to be provided at appropriate location as per manufacturer’s

design. All iron mongery preparation to have adequate reinforcement for flushes fixing at
site.

Vision panel are to be provided with toughened clear float glass of the thickness 6mm. Glass
to be fixed with clip on frames for square and rectangular vision panels and with spin turned
rings for circular vision panels. Unless otherwise specified, standard sizes are
130mmx270mm, 200x300mm, 450x750mm and 380mm diameter.
Finish: The shutters are to be suitably cleaned with solvents and etch primered for receiving
primer and top coats. Shutters to be primered in zinc phosphate stoving primer (35microns
DFT). The shutters are to be finished in thermo setting paint (35microns DFT) of approved
colour and make as specified by Client/PMC.

11.9.5.4 PACKING:
Frame: Individual frame members are to be wrapped in polythene sheets and placed in
individual card board boxes. Individual boxes to be sealed. Frames are to be assembled at
site with the aid of roofing bolts.

Shutters: Shutters to be wrapped in polyethene sheets and further packed in card board and
duly strapped. All frames and shutters duly marked as per door schedule for easy
identification at site.

11.9.5.5 STORAGE

All knocked down frames shall be stacked flat and shutters vertically on wooden runners and
suitably covered as per the instructions of manufacturer to prevent rust and damage.

11.9.5.6. INSTALLATION - Installation shall be the same as specified in clause 11.9.4.6.

11.9.5.7 GENERAL PURPOSE DOOR - HARDWARE SCHEDULE

a) Where locking / latching Mortice sash lock 50/60 mm backset. Double action
provision is required deadbolt brass / nickel finish of Dorset make. 5pin
tumbler brass cylinder 70 mm length. One side key one
side knob operation and Nickel / Brass lever handles
with independent escutcheon of Dorma/Geze make.
b) Where latching provision Mortice latch 50 mm backset field reversible latch and
is required handles, brass/nickel finish of Dorma/Geze make.
c) Where locking provision Mortice dead bolt double action 50 mm backset saw
required resistance bolt - brass / nickel finish of Dorma/Geze
make.
d) Cylindrical knob Lock set One side key one side push button stainless steel satin
finish of ACME or Brass / Satin finish Dorm/Geze make.
 e) Hinges Stainless steel double bearing butt hinges 102x89x3mm
thick hinge holes template drilled as per ANSI of
Dorma/Geze make.
f) Door Closer Hydraulic heavy duty double speed pressure die cast
body with steel rack and pinion door closer of
Dorma/Geze make.
Flush bolts (Double Concealed flush bolts 300 mm length with steel bolt of
g) doors) Dorma/Geze make.
Stainless steel “D” handles 19 mm x 300 mm length.
Through bolt fixing with estruction in satin finish of
h) Stainless Steel “D” handle Dorma / Geze make.
Stainless steel push plate of size surface fixed size
i) Stainless steel push plate 300x75x1.6mm of Dorma/Geze make.
Where only one side handle is required and one side
Push Plate shall be as detailed below.
300mmx19mm dia SS “D” handle with inside bolt fixing.
Stainless Steel “D/SS” 300x75x1.6mm SS push plate fixed with surface
j) push plate mounted head screw.
Self adhesive EPDM Smoke Seal ‘FLAT’ type
(Polyethylene cross linked foam of size 2mm thick and
k) Smoke seal 12.5mm width) of Monarch makes.

11.9.6 FIELD INSPECTION

After installing the door, the Contractor shall test the performance of the shutter in the
presence of the Owner/PMC. The doors shall be smoothly operatable under all ambient
conditions. All control and locking devices shall give fault free performance.

11.9.7 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

Measurement shall be in square metre for clear area over one face inclusive of exposed
frame. Portions embedded in masonry / concrete / flooring shall not be measured.

-------End of Section-11-----
SECTION-12- FLOORING, DADOING AND SKIRTING WORKS:

12.1. SCOPE:

12.1.1. This specification covers the general requirements for flooring and dadoing of various types
of finishes including supplying, installation, finishing, curing, testing, protecting, maintaining
until handing over.

12.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

12.2.1. The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, equipment, scaffolding,
materials etc., required for complete execution of the work in accordance with the drawings
and as described herein and / or as directed by the Owner/PMC.

12.2.2. The Contractor should have adequate experience in execution of such works. Alternatively,
he should engage specialized agency for executing the work after obtaining approval from
the Owner/PMC.

12.2.3. All works shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standard Specifications, as per the
instructions of manufacturer and as directed by Owner/PMC. The Contractor shall carryout
all works including preparation of base, chipping extra concrete, roughening of surface and
skin removing, cleaning, screeding, leveling, curing, protecting the slab / tile by using pop
over plastic sheet etc.

12.2.4. The commencement, scheduling and sequence of the finishing works shall be planned in
details and must be specifically approved by the Owner/PMC, keeping in view the activities
of other agencies working in the area. However, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible
for all normal precautions and vigilance to prevent and damage whatsoever till handing over
to the Owner.

12.2.5. Only approved make, colour, size of tiles / slabs to form any pattern in combination of any
specified colour shall be used.

12.3. CODES AND STANDARDS:

The important applicable Indian Codes for this section are listed below and the latest
editions of these codes shall be followed:

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:1237 Cement concrete flooring tiles
2. IS:4457 Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles
3. IS:5491 Laying of in-situ granolithic concrete flooring topping
4. IS:13753 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E10%
5. IS:13755 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption 3% of E 6%
(Group B.II.a)

12.4. MATERIALS:

12.4.1. Cement: Ordinary Portland cement of 43Grade conforming to IS:8112 and as specified under
concrete work of Technical Specification.
12.4.2. Coarse Aggregate: As specified under concrete works and conforming to IS:383.

12.4.3. Fine Aggregates: As specified under concrete works and conforming to IS:383.

12.4.4. Water: As specified under concrete works.

12.5. FLOORING MATERIALS:

Materials required for individual finishing items are specified under respective items. In
general, all such materials shall be in accordance with the relevant IS Codes where
applicable. In all cases these materials shall be of the best indigenous quality unless
specified otherwise.

The materials for finishing items must be procured from well-reputed approved specialized
manufactures and on the basis of approval of samples by the Owner/PMC. The materials
shall be ordered, procured and stored well in advance to avoid possible delays to the
construction program.

12.6. WORKMANSHIP:

Workers especially experienced in particular items of finishing work shall carry out the work.
Where such workers are not readily available, experienced supervisors recommended by
the manufacturer shall be engaged with the prior permission and based on approval of the
Owner/PMC. In particular cases, Owner/PMC may desire the installation of finishing items
by the manufacturer. This arrangement shall be made by the Contractor.

12.7. PREPARATION OF THE BASE SURFACE

For all types of flooring, skirting, dado, the base (base concrete / structural slab / masonry
wall / concrete wall etc.) to receive the finish shall be adequately roughened, joints raked,
thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose particle, caked mortar droppings, and laitance, if
any by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush before the operation of laying the topping is
started. Where the concrete is hardened so much that roughening the surface by wire brush
is not possible, the entire surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking and the skin
removed. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and soaked with water, at least for twelve
hours and the surplus water shall be removed by mopping immediately before the topping
is laid in position. The prepared surface has to be approved by the Owner/PMC before
commencing the finishing work

12.8. GRANOLITHIC FLOORING:

12.8.1. General:

The work shall be carried out in accordance with IS:5491 latest. The flooring shall be of
specified thickness and shall consist of CC 1:1.5:3 granolithic flooring. Floor finish shall be
divided into suitable panels so as to reduce and avoid the risk of cracking. The granolithic
flooring shall be laid with the specified strips in panels not exceeding 20Sqm in plan. The
 screed strips shall be fixed on the base concrete dividing it into suitable panels not
exceeding 20Sqm in plan. The intermediate panels shall be filled in after one or two days. If
glass or aluminium or other metal strips are provided for effective separation of panels, the
topping may be laid in all the panels simultaneously or as specified.

12.8.2. Laying:

a. Before the operation of laying the topping is started, the surface of base concrete shall be
prepared as described earlier, screed strips shall be fixed over the base as divided.

b. The flooring concrete shall be of using 6 to 10 mm graded crushed granite stone. The
ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed with sufficient water to obtain the required plasticity.
The free water on the surface of the base shall be removed and a coat of cement slurry of
the consistency of thick cream shall be brushed on the surface.

c. The prepared concrete shall be laid immediately after mixing on the fresh grouted base. The
concrete shall be spread evenly and levelled carefully and compacted. Then the surface shall
be tested with the straight edge and mason’s spirit level to detect any inequalities in the
surface. Low places shall be filled, humps removed and the whole surface again levelled. The
layer shall be thoroughly compacted to the finished thickness by ramming and power
trowelled and allowed to set. Just sufficient toweling shall be made to give a level surface.
The surface should not be over trowelled as excessive toweling will bring the cement to the
surface which shall be strictly avoided. When the initial set takes place further compaction
by power toweling shall be done and final toweling shall be done well before the topping
becomes too hard.

d. The surface shall be trowelled three times at intervals so as to produce a uniform, hard and
smooth surface. No mortar or cement will be allowed to be added in this process.

e. The screed strips should be removed the next day after the concrete has been deposited in
the panels and the edges of panels shall be examined for any honeycombing or undulation
which, if found, shall be repaired straight and smooth by cement mortar; if the intermediate
panels are not to be filled the next day, the screed strips shall then be cleared and put back
against the edge of panels till the concrete in the alternate panels is to be deposited. When
the concrete is being deposited in the alternate panels the screed strips shall be removed.
When the concrete is being compacted in new panels, care shall be taken to avoid damage
to the panels already laid. When desired by the Owner/PMC, the surface while still ‘green’
shall be intended by pressing strings. The markings and forming a groove shall be of even
size and depth, in straight lines and the panels shall be of uniform and symmetrical patterns.
12.8.3 Curing: As soon as the surface is hard enough, it shall be covered with sacking or sand and
kept continuously wet for a period of at least one week.

12.8.4. Protection: The surface shall be protected with a layer of pop to a required thickness over a
plastic sheet.

12.9. CERAMIC TILES:

12.9.1. Types of Ceramic Tile:

12.9.1.1. Glazed Ceramic Tiles:

Glazed ceramic tiles shall be highly pressed, single fired, red body, top glazed white or
coloured, plain or with designs.

The body of glazed ceramic tiles should consist of high grade clay and minerals and well
pressed in hydraulic presses and glaze should be a combination of different minerals. Varied
combination of the body materials, glaze coating and the firing temperature will give tiles of
varied strength, abrasion resistance, surface hardness, and antiskid properties. The top
surface shall be glazed with stable gloss / semi gloss / matt finish of uniform colour and
texture and free from flaws, cracks, chips, craze, specks, crawling or other imperfections.
These shall be sound, true to shape with true and straight edges, non-absorbing and non-
fading. A fractured section shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogenous. The
edges and the underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze so that these may
adhere properly to the surface below.

The underside of tiles shall have ribs or indentations for better anchorage with the base
mortar / adhesive specified

The group and quality of tiles specified in the bill of quantities and as shown on the drawings
shall be used as directed by the Owner/PMC, even though the group of tiles specified below:

12.9.1.2. Floor Tiles:

These tiles should have high strength, good resistance to wear and tear, low water
absorption and sufficient antiskid properties and shall conform to IS : 13755 and BLLA EN177
(European Standard). Based on the properties of the glaze and their hardness, floor tiles are
categorized abrasion resistance wise as Group – II to V / V +. According to the intensity of
foot traffic, the tile group shall be selected and used as given below.

Group II tiles shall be used for areas destined to medium foot traffic, to be trod on with
leather or rubber footwear.

Group III tiles shall be used for areas destined to frequent foot traffic with medium abrasion.

Group IV tiles shall be used for areas destined to a strong passage and intensive foot traffic
with heavy abrasion.

Group V – Floor tiles having very high Abrasive Resistance shall be used for areas destined to
high intensive foot traffic with heavy abrasion.

12.9.1.3. Wall tiles:

 Ceramic wall tiles shall be single fast fired tiles having medium water absorption and high
strength characteristics. These tiles should have high glaze and better adhesion to wall and
shall conform to IS : 13753 and EN 159 standards. Wall tiles shall be glossy / semi glossy /
matt glaze finish, white or coloured, plain or printed, special printed and premium printed.
These tiles shall be sound, uniform colour, true to shape with true and straight edges and
non-fading.

12.9.1.4. Vitrified (Unglazed) Ceramic Unpolished / Polished Tiles:

These tiles are of different shades having monolithic body which is pressed in very high
tonnage press and fired to high temperature. The tiles shall be homogeneous and compact
throughout the entire body with very high strength, low porosity and extreme surface
hardness, high resistance to abrasion resistant to chemicals etc. and shall conform to IS :
4457 and EN 98 standards. The tiles shall be sound, non-absorbing flat and true to shape
with straight edges. The tiles shall be with smooth surface or textured anti-skid finish
surface. The tiles should be free from any warping, deformation any chipping and any
scratches. The tiles shall be in absolute level. The underside of tiles shall have ribs or
indentations for better anchorage with the base mortar / adhesive as specified.

Polished vitrified ceramic floor tiles shall be homogeneous heavy and tough with highly
reflective polished surface but non-slippery. The tiles shall be in different shades and shall
have uniform colour, size and thickness.

12.9.2. Samples:

Samples of each type / design / finish / print / size / colours of tiles shall be submitted well in
advance to the Owner/PMC for approval at Contractor cost.

Approved sample tiles will be retained by the Owner/PMC. All tiles procured should be
exactly as per approved samples. Tiles shall be procured from a single approved source /
manufacturers who can provide products of consistent quality and physical properties. The
manufacturer of tiles should be an approved company specializing in ceramic tiles.

Tiles of approved make, colour, design, finish, size etc. as stipulated in item description
and /or as shown in the drawings only should be procured and used on the works.

12.9.3. Storage of Materials:

The delivery of tiles shall be in original containers with seals unbroken. Adequate precaution
shall be taken to prevent accidental damage to tiles while unloading and these shall be
stored under cover in a manner approved by the Owner/PMC. Adhesives shall be stored as
per the manufacturer’s instructions.

12.9.4. Laying and Finishing of Floor tiles:

Preparation of base shall be as specified under head “Preparation of Base Surface”.

The under bed for flooring shall be of 20 mm average thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 part
cement and 4 parts sand) or as specified in item specification. The bedding shall be laid
evenly over the surface, tamped and corrected to desired levels and allowed to harden
enough to offer a fairly rigid cushion to tiles. Before fixing the tiles, the bed mortar shall be
roughened by scratching diagonal lines at closed intervals and grey cement slurry of honey
like consistency shall be applied over the bedding. Tiles shall be well soaked in water
 washed clean and fixed in cement grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped in
its position with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining
tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required
pattern. Where the full tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size
and their edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. When grouting the tiles
special care shall be taken to prevent scratch. After the tiles have been laid, surplus cement
grout shall be cleaned off. The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with a wire
brush or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then
be flush pointed with grout of white cement mixed with “Roff Rainbow Tile Mate” or
approved equivalent, to match the colour of tiles as per Manufacturer’s specification. The
floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed with mild
hydrochloric acid and clean water. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped
with a wooden mallet.

12.9.5. Laying and Finishing of Wall Tiles:

Preparation of wall surface shall be as specified under head “Preparation of Base Surface”.

A 12mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 mix or as specified in item shall be applied and
allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching
diagonal at closed intervals and cured properly. The tiles should be washed clean and a coat
of cement slurry applied liberally at the back of tiles and set in the bedding mortar and for
pointing the tiles. If specified in the item, chemical adhesive of approved make shall be
used for setting the tiles in the bedding mortar. For maintaining uniform gap and alignment
plastic spacer should be used. The tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper plan and
lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and jointed true to plumb. The joints shall
be as fine as possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical except where otherwise indicated or as directed by Owner/PMC.

Skirting / dado shall rest on the top of the flooring where full size tiles cannot be fixed these
shall be cut (swan) to the required size and height as specified and their edges rubbed
smooth. The joints shall be cleaned off with wire / coir brush or trowel and all dust and
loose mortar removed. Joints than shall be flush pointed with grout of white cement mixed
with “Roff Rainbow Tile Mate” or approved equivalent to match the colour of tiles as per
manufacturer specification. The work shall then be kept wet for 7days.

After curing, the surface shall be washed with mild hydrochloric acid and clean water. The
finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

12.9.6. The surface shall be protected with a layer of pop to a required thickness over a plastic
sheet.

12.10. CEMENT BASED COLOUR AND PATTERNED TILES:

12.10.1. Cement tile to be used for external and internal applications shall be manufactured using
very high quality raw materials, high strength cement; colour pigments etc. to withstand all
conditions of sever intensity in terms of temperature, vagaries of the nature, traffic,
extreme heat and cold etc. and shall conform to IS:1237.

The tiles shall be heavy, dense, and homogeneous in texture with high strength and surface
hardness, high resistance to abrasion and low porosity. Thickness of floor tiles shall be
22mm and wall tiles shall be 12mm.
 Tiles of approved make, colour, design, and plain chequered or grooved pattern etc. as
shown on the drawings, as specified in the Bill of Quantities shall be used in the works as
directed by the Owner/PMC. Laying of tiles in any pattern in combination of any colour tiles
desired by the Owner/PMC shall be carrying out without any extra cost.

12.10.2. Samples: Samples of each type / design / finish / print / size / colours of tiles shall be
submitted well in advance to the Owner/PMC for approval at Contractor cost.

Approved sample tiles will be retained by the Owner/PMC. All tiles procured should be
exactly as per approved samples. Tiles shall be procured from a single approved source

Tiles of approved make, colour, design, finish, size etc. as stipulated in item description and
/ or as shown in the drawings only should be procured and used on the works.
12.10.3. Storage: Tiles shall be stacked and stored as per instructions of the manufacturer.

12.10.4. Laying and Finishing Of Floor Tiles:

A bedding of 20 mm thick with cement mortar 1:4 (one part of cement and four parts of
coarse sand) or as specified shall be laid over the prepared base after setting the levels for
the floor. Neat cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the levelled base
mortar. The tiles after wetting the reverse side shall be fixed in the cement grout one after
the other, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet to obtain perfect levels. The
laid surface shall be cleaned with water immediately with wet sponge. It shall be ensured
that the cement grout which squeezes through joints does not settle on the tile. The joints,
after cleaning, shall be pointed with white cement mixed with colour pigment of tile finish
like “Roff Rainbow Tile make or approved equivalent. The surface shall be cured for 7days.
The surface shall be maintained by cleaning the tiles regularly with water and detergent.

12.10.5. Laying and finishing of wall tiles: Laying of wall tiles shall be in the same manner as described
above for floor tiles.

12.10.6. The surface shall be protected with a layer of pop to a required thickness over a plastic
sheet.

12.11. SHAHABAD, TANDUR, KOTAH AND CUDDAPAH FLOORING:

The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard sound, dense, homogenous in texture, free from
cracks, decay, weathering and flaws and of thickness as specified. The top exposed faces
should have been roughly polished before bringing it to site. Unless otherwise specified the
slabs should be cut to the required shape and size, by machine cut as specified. All pieces
should be of uniform colour.

A bed of cement mortar 1:4 shall be laid and properly levelled to an average thickness of
20mm and the surface should be kept slightly rough to form a satisfactory key for the tiles.
Neat cement paste of honey like consistency shall be spread over mortar bed over such an
area so that the paste will not harden before laying tiles. Slabs shall be soaked in water for
15 minutes and allowed to dry. The slabs shall then be fixed as per approved pattern with
thin coat of cement paste on back of each slab. They will be tapped with a wooden mallet till
it is properly bedded in level with adjoining slabs. Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and
in straight lines or to suit the required pattern. The surplus cement grout that may have
come out of the joints has to be wiped off gently and joints cleaned. The joints shall be filled
up with grey or white cement with an admixture of pigments to match the shade of the slab.
The flooring shall be cured for 14 days.
 Protection: The surface shall be protected with a layer of pop to a required thickness over a
plastic sheet.

12.12. GRANITE FLOORING / DADOING:

The slabs must be of uniform thickness as specified the variation in the thickness not
exceeding 2mm and must be from the same source. They shall be of uniform texture and
colour free of any veins and streaks. All the edge shall be chiseled true to line, square and
shape. The brushes in the joints are not more than specified thickness.

12.12.1. Rough Finish:

The surface should be rough dressed/one line dressed/two lines dressed/three line dressed
finish using palmane tools as specified.

a. Rough dressing: The stone surface to be chisel dressed to one plane by removing all
bushings so that the maximum depression is not more than 6 mm.

b. One line dressing: This is done after the rough dressing is completed by point chiseling
so that the variations are not more than 4mm. Work includes rough dressing also.

c. Two line dressing: This is done after one line dressing is done by chiseling so that
variations are not more than 2.5mm. Work includes rough and one line dressing also.

d. Three lines dressing: This is done after two lines dressing is over by chiseling so that the
variations are not more than 1.5 mm. Work includes rough, one line & two line dressing
also.

e. Palmane dressing: After the three line dressing is over the surface is smoothened by
using a special Palmane tool to further even out the 3 line dressed surface so that the
maximum variation in surface evenness is not more than 1.0 mm. Work includes rough,
one line, two line & three line dressing also unless otherwise stated.

f. Mirror Finish: The surface will be polished by grinding using manual or mechanical
process to give a smooth, even, perfect plane surface or as may be directed. The
polished surface should reflect light like a mirror free from scratches and depressions.

12.12.2. Protection:

Granite slabs in flooring shall be protected with layer of pop to a required thickness over a
plastic sheet. The pop and plastic sheet shall be removed and one coat of polishing to be
carried out if required before handing over.

12.13. MARBLE FLOORING / DADOING:

Marble slabs of approved shade, variety, size and thickness as specified in the item shall be
used. They shall be of selected quality, dense, uniform and homogeneous in texture and
free from cracks or other structural defects. The exposed face shall have no veins or
unsightly stains and defects. They shall have uniform milky white or coloured shade or
patterns of colours approved by Owner/PMC. Samples shall be got approved by the
Owner/PMC before ordering the slabs. The surface shall be fine polished and side’s machine
cut, true to square.
 Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with crystalline and course
grains. It shall be free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering. The place of quarrying,
colour and quality and thickness should be as specified. Every stone must be machine cut to
a specified size in any direction and shape chisel dressed on all sides so as to be free from
waviness and to give truly vertical, horizontal, radial and circular joints as required. Chisel
dressing shall also be done on exposed faces to remove any waviness. The sides and top
surfaces of marble slabs shall be machine rubbed with coarse sand before using. Marble
slabs in borders, joints and soffits of entrances, openings and skirting shall be in full width.
Marble slabs in treads and risers of steps shall be in single pieces with rounded edges or
angular edges as may be described. All the exposed edges of these are to be machine cut
and polished smooth along with exposed faces. In all cases samples shall be got approved.

12.13.1. Flooring slabs will be set in cement mortar 1:4 proportion 20mm thick and white cement
slurry under marble stone slab. In other places slabs will be set in CM 1:3 - 12mm thick.
Polishing will be rough, medium, nice, acid wash and tin- oxide as per Industry
manufacture's specification and as approved by the Owner/PMC including fixing with brass \
copper clamps 12mm diameter and 100mm long caulked into slab, let into the brick
masonry walls and cement grouted.

12.13.2. When a single course of marble slab is to be fixed as in dado etc., the slab shall be fixed as
described below.

Mortar pads of 1: 2 CM of uniform width shall be struck on to the wall at close intervals and
the marble slabs shall be pressed on to them firmly. The remaining cavities if any shall then
be filled with thin grout of cement mortar of the same proportion. The sound coming, on
gently tapping of the slab will indicate if there are hollows. When the hollow cannot be filled
with grout and the finished slab continues to give a hollow sound on tapping, the slab shall
be removed and reset.

12.13.3. For fascia work where more than one course is required, the marble slabs shall be fixed in
the same way as described above except that at horizontal joints of the slab, adjacent slabs
shall be held together by a wrought iron/copper pin passing through a hole drilled into the
slabs. In addition, wrought iron/copper hold fasts/dowels shall be provided to anchor the
slabs to the wall. The hold fasts shall be counter-sunk into the joints of the slab and it shall
be located at a specified interval subject to a minimum of one for each slab for each
horizontal joint.

12.13.4. The facing shall be fixed truly in plumb and in perfect line or curves as shown on the plans.
The courses and joints shall be as directed by Owner/PMC. The surface shall be protected
from sun and rain and cured for ten days and shall be finally polished.

12.13.5. Protection:

Marble slabs in flooring shall be protected with layer of pop to a required thickness over a
plastic sheet. The pop and plastic sheet shall be removed and one coat of polishing to be
carried out if required before handing over.

12.14. VINYL FLOORING:

PVC based vinyl Tiles and Rolls set with adhesive on to a concrete or masonry base shall
conform to latest IS: 3462.

12.14.1. Materials:
12.14.1.1. Tiles:

The tiles should be calendared laminated solid resilient unbreakable and homogeneous
flexible quartz reinforced PVC Vinyl tiles composed of 100% vinyl from face to back with
alkaline resisting colour pigments and other plastic compounds in different shades and
designs and in different sizes and thickness and shall conform to IS : 3462. Unless otherwise
mentioned the tiles shall be squares of approved dimensions. Tiles shall have properties of a
high wear resistance and resilience, designed to withstand high traffic and abrasion. The
face of these tiles shall be free from porosity, blisters, cracks, embedded foreign matter, or
other physical defects, which affect the appearance or impair the service ability of the tiles.

All edges shall be cut true and square. The colour shall be non-fading and uniform in
appearance, insoluble in water and resistant to alkalis cleaning agents and usual floor
polishes.

Cove base shall be extruded PVC (100% putty) with moulded top set cove colour and the
height of the base shall be as indicated on the drawings, scheduling and / or as approved by
Owner/PMC.

Samples of tile and cove base shall be submitted to the Owner/PMC along with test
certificate for approval.

12.14.1.2. Rolls:

It should be calendared laminated solid resilient unbreakable and homogeneous quartz

reinforced flexible PVC Vinyl Flooring in different shades and designs and in different width
and thickness with inherent characteristics of wear resistance, dimensional stability,
elegance etc and shall conform to IS: 3462.

Each packet of tile or roll shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer’s trade
mark, thickness, size batch number and date of manufacture.

Rolls shall be delivered securely packed and store in clean, dry, well ventilated places.

12.14.1.3. Adhesive:

Synthetic rubber based adhesive to be used for fixing tiles shall be Dunlop S-758 or Fevicol
SR-998 or equivalent or as recommended by the manufacturer. The adhesive shall have a
short drying time and long life. Each container shall show the self life, date of manufacture
and over age container shall be immediately removed from the site.

12.14.2. Sub-floor:

The surface of sub-floor to receive this finish shall be firm, hard, smooth even textured,
without undulations and other deficiencies. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All
loose dust particles shall be removed. Oil grit and grease, if any shall be removed completely
by the using detergent and sub-floor should be carefully dried prior to laying.

12.14.3. Laying:

The tiles shall be stored in the room to be tiled for at least 24 hours to bring them to the
same temperature as the room. In air conditioning spaces, the air conditioning shall be fully
operational before the tiling is laid.
 The adhesive shall be applied uniformly at the rate recommended by the Manufacturer to
the fully dry surface in the desired thickness. The adhesive shall also be applied to the backs
and edges of the tiles and surface shall be allowed to “touch dry” before fixing. The tiles
shall then be placed neatly on the surface exactly to the approved pattern and set firmly
with a suitable tool. After it has adhered, vinyl tiles shall be rolled in two directions with a
roller weighing 45 Kg. or more. If the edges tend to curl up, weights are to be applied to
keep the edges down. Special care shall be taken to avoid the formation of air pockets under
the tiles. The joints shall be very fine. Any adhesive squeezed out through the joints shall be
removed and cleaned immediately.

Rolls are to be stacked on the sub-floor following the grain directions of the rolls.

Joint welding can be provided where ever the PVC Rolls are installed in order to avoid dust
accumulation leakage of water and prevention from wear and tear in joints. In this, a PVC
cord is put into the joint after making grooves with machine and is welded with hot thermo
welding machine.

Adhesives and other materials used must have resistance against the corrosive chemicals.
Any defective surface must be capable of easy replacement. Joints shall be finished smooth
and will not be a source of accumulation of dust, pool of liquid etc.

Tile shall be fitted to and around all permanent fixtures. Borders shall be fitted accurately.
Exposed edges or tile at door sills etc. shall be protected with metal moulding.

Cove base shall be firmly cemented to the walls and accurately scribed to trim and plinth.

12.14.4. Finishing:

Any adhesive marks on the surface shall be removed by wiping with a soft cloth soaked in
solvent. The surface shall be cleaned with soft soap, dried and then polished with approved
type of acrylic base emulsion polish using a soft cloth. A time interval of at least 60 minutes
must be given between the applications of each coat of polish. After the polishing is done
duration of eight hours must be provided for the adhesive and polish to set before the area
is put into regular use.

12.14.5. Protection: The surface shall be protected by covering with a plastic sheet over which,
Gypsum powder / POP shall be provided. The same shall be removed before handing over
the area for use of work.

12.15. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

The finish shall be checked specially for:

12.15.1. Level, slope, plumb as the case may be (The surface of the finish shall be smooth and within
+/-5 mm of the specified level or position. Local irregularities shall be within +/-3 mm when
measured against a 3metre straight edge. Abrupt changes of alignment shall not exceed
2mm).

12.15.2. Pattern and symmetry

12.15.3. Alignment of joints, dividing strips, etc.

12.15.4. Colour, texture

12.15.5. Surface finish

12.15.6. Thickness of joints

12.15.7. Details of edges, junctions, etc.

12.15.8. Performance

12.15.9. Precautions specified for durability

12.16. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:

The method of measurement for various items shall be generally in accordance with the IS:
1200 subject to the following:

12.16.1. Floor: Flooring shall be measured from skirting to skirting and where the wall surfaces are
plastered or provided with dado it shall be measured from plaster to plaster or dado to
dado. The measurements shall be in square metre.

12.16.2. Skirting: The measurement for skirting shall be in running metre. The height of skirting shall
be specified in bill of quantities.

12.16.3. Dado: Dadoing shall be measured from finished floor level to specified height in the Bill of
Materials. The measurements shall be in square metre.

-------End of Section-12-----
SECTION-13- WATER PROOFING WORKS:

13.1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

13.1.1 This work covered under this specification consist of providing and laying cement based
water proofing treatment to the horizontal and vertical surfaces of various components like
underground basement raft slab, walls, trenches, lift well, toilet sunken slabs and beams,
roof terraces, chajjas and water tank etc. of the building.

13.1.2 This specification also covers the guarantee to be given by the executing agency for leak
proof of the treatment for a period of ten years.

13.2. APPLICABLE CODES and SPECIFICATIONS:

13.2.1 The relevant I.S. specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of this
specification. All standards, specifications, code of practices referred to herein shall be the
latest edition including all applicable amendments, revisions and additional publications.

13.2.2 List of Indian Standards:

Sl.No. Code Number Description

1. IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil (Part-IX)
engineering works (Roof covering)
2. IS:2645 Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds.
3. IS:9103 Admixtures for concrete

13.3. GENERAL:

13.3.1. The work of water proofing treatment shall be executed through a specialized agency having
sufficient experience in the field of all types of cement based water proofing works.

13.3.2. The contractor shall submit the detailed specifications and the details of the agency to be
appointed for water proofing works for approval of the Owner/PMC before commencement
of work.

13.3.3. The contractor shall provide at site a competent supervisor who should be able to advise the
requirements of the lean concrete base course for horizontal water proofing.

13.3.4. The contractor shall also bring to the notice of the Owner/PMC, the protective measures
required for the protection of the water proofing for subsequent operations over it.

13.3.5. The performance guarantee bond for all the water proofing works carried out by the water
proofing agency will be required to be furnished by them through the contractors.

13.3.6. In addition to the above the main civil contractor also shall have to submit the performance
guarantee bond in the prescribed form for water proofing guarantee as specified in
Appendix-B.

13.4. SURFACE PREPARATION

 The surfaces to be treated shall be cleaned to be free from dust, dirt, loose material, debris,
mortar droppings, laitance, oil, grease or any other form of foreign matter which might
affect adhesion and left in a saturated, surface dried condition and approval of Owner/PMC
to be taken before starting the work. The surface to be treated in underground structures
shall be kept dry by continuous pumping of water. The surface preparation shall be done
as per specification and instructions of the manufacturer.

13.5. WAER PROOFING TREATMENT TO UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

The treatment is to be in three stages as described in 13.5.1, 13.5.2 and 13.5.3 in below.

13.5.1. Treatment for raft slab in basement, underground sumps and lift pit:

The following procedure is to be followed for treating the top surface of PCC leveling course
before casting of base slab:

a) The PCC top surface shall be cured for the required period.

b) The surface preparation to be done for the PCC top surface as described in 13.4.

c) Providing and laying one layer of 20mm thick Cement concrete slurry 1:2:4, using 6mm
and down size aggregate admixed with approved normal setting integral cement water
proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 @ 2% by weight of cement or at the rate
specified by the manufacturer on the top of the PCC surface as per specifications and
instructions of the manufacturer. The plaster layer should be finished smooth trowel
finish and cured for 1day.

d) Apply two coats of Acrylic Polymer modified cementitious coating as per manufacturer's
specification and instructions. Each coating shall be cured with water for 1day.

e) The surface coating as described in above shall be covered with 20mm thick Cement
concrete slurry 1:2:4, using 6 mm and down size aggregate as described under clause.(c)
above. The treated surface shall be cured for 5days.

f) The base slab concrete is admixed with normal setting integral waterproofing
compound conforming to IS: 2645 as per recommended dosage. This admixture is to be
added if so specifically ordered in the bills of quantities.

13.5.2. Chemical injection treatment to base slab of basement, underground sumps and lift pit:

Chemical injection treatment in the form of pressure grouting is to be done for the concrete
mass of base slab. The treatment shall be as per manufacturer’s specification adopting
following general operation details:
Provide 18mm diameter holes by drilling on top of base slab to the required depth using
pneumatic hammer drill in grid pattern at a spacing not exceeding 1mtx1mt. Particular care
should be taken to drill holes and fix GI nozzles along the construction joint line wherever it
occurs and on other vulnerable areas.

a) The depth of GI nozzles shall be adequate to push the grout at all depth. GI nozzles shall
be fixed in the holes using single component rapid setting mortar.
 b) Cement slurry mixed with non-shrink polymer waterproof grouting compound at 2% by
weight of cement as per specification and instruction of the manufacturer shall be
prepared to the required consistency.

c) The prepared slurry shall be injected through the prefixed GI nozzles under pressure
using grout pump to fill all possible pores and gaps left within the concrete mass. When
the flow of the grout stops the grout mains shall be disconnected.

d) The GI nozzles shall be sealed off with single component rapid setting mortar after the
injection operation is over.

e) The grout holes shall then be filled and finished after cutting the projected GI nozzles.

13.5.3. Treatment to basement, underground water sump and lift pit side walls:

This treatment is to be done for side wall from exterior surface.

a. The RCC wall concrete is admixed with specified grade of concrete admixed with normal
setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645 as per recommended
dosage. This admixture is to be added if so specifically ordered in the bills of quantities.

b) Provide 18mm diameter holes by drilling on top of base slab to the required depth using
pneumatic hammer drill in grid pattern at a spacing not exceeding 1mtx1mt. Particular
care should be taken to drill holes and fix GI nozzles along the construction joint line
wherever it occurs and on other vulnerable areas.

c) The depth of GI nozzles shall be adequate to push the grout at all depth. GI nozzles shall
be fixed in the holes using single component rapid setting mortar.

d) Cement slurry mixed with non-shrink polymer waterproof grouting compound at 2% by

weight of cement as per specification and instruction of the manufacturer shall be
prepared to the required consistency.

e) The prepared slurry shall be injected through the prefixed GI nozzles under pressure
using grout pump to fill all possible pores and gaps left within the concrete mass. When
the flow of the grout stops the grout mains shall be disconnected.

g) The GI nozzles shall be sealed off with single component rapid setting mortar after the
injection operation is over.The grout holes shall then be filled and finished after cutting
the projected GI nozzles.

h) The outside surface of wall shall be prepared as described under head "Surface
Preparation" after the chemical injection treatment is over.

i) The prepared exterior surface shall be coated (2coats) with acrylic polymer modified
cementitious coating as per manufacturer's specification and instructions. The surface
shall be cured with water for 1day.

j) On top of the above coating a 15mm thick plaster with cement sand mortar (1:4)
admixed with normal setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645,
shall be applied as per specifications and instructions of the manufacturer. The
plastering coat shall be finished smooth with a steel trowel and cured for 5days.
 k) In case of nil accessibility owing to constructional hazards, etc. the interior surface of
wall may be treated as mentioned above to produce same effect.

13.5.4. Treatment to cover slab to be open to sky in the underground structures:

a) The RCC cover slab concrete is admixed with specified grade of concrete admixed with
normal setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645 as per
recommended dosage. This admixture is to be added if so specifically ordered in the bills
of quantities.

b) Treatment to side walls including chemical injection treatment as described above shall
be adopted for cover slab also.

13.6. TREATMENT TO ROOF SLABS:

13.6.1. Treatment of terrace roof slab:

a) The RCC terrace slab concrete is to be admixed with specified grade of concrete
admixed with normal setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645 as
per recommended dosage. This admixture is to be added if so specifically ordered in the
bills of quantities.

b) The surface shall then be prepared as described above under head "Surface
preparation".

c) Making V groove at construction joints and filling the “V” Groove with quick setting
material and saturate the RCC slab and masonry wall with water to receive the water
proofing treatment.

d) Applying 2-coats of acrylic polymer based elastomeric, flexible water proofing coating
slurry to a thickness of 2mm and cured for 7days and spread a layer of 20mm thick
cement mortar 1:4 admixed with approved normal setting integral water proofing
compound over the prepared surface.

e) Provide and lay well burnt brick bats (COBA) to an average minimum thickness of
55mm (i.e. minimum 40mm thickness at lower end and 70mm thickness at higher
end) over the spreaded mortar layer as described above. An additional layer of brick
bat (COBA) shall be laid over the existing brick bat COBA surface if required to get the
required gradient for adequate drainage giving a slope of approximately 1 in 100,
which will be measured separately under relevant item.
f) The gap between brick bat shall be filled with cement mortar 1:4 admixed with
waterproofing compound and curing shall be carried out for two days. A final layer of
cement mortar of 1:3 admixed with approved water proofing compound shall be laid
to a thickness of 20mm with one layer of fibre glass water proofing cloth (MGI-207-
T6) from MICA glass industries.

g) Making machine cut grooves of size 4mmx4mm on a grid of 5mtx5mt (Plan area not
exceeding 25Sqmt) and the grooves shall be filled with Polysulphide sealant -"
VULKEM - 202 PU" from supreme or approved equivalent make and finish the surface
neatly and the surface shall be cured for 15 days as per manufacturer's specification.
This treatment shall be carried out in the openings provided in the terrace for rain
water down take pipes.

13.6.2. Treatment of Parapet wall:

 a) The parapet wall shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dust particles.

b) A layer of 15mm thick C.M 1:3 shall be laid to a height of about 300mm above the top
of the terrace / Gutter slab on the Parapet / Gutter side wall admixed with approved
water proofing compound. Providing, supplying, mixing, applying two coats of ready
to use two component Acrylic based elastomeric, flexible water proofing coating
slurry to a thickness of 2mm over the plastered surface of operation above including
preparation of surface, dewatering, finishing, curing etc., all complete as per
manufacturer's specification and as directed.

c) A vatta (Gola) is then prepared with brick bats using C.M 1:3 admixed with approved
water proofing compound at the junction between the slab and wall.

d) The vatta is further plastered with 20mm thick cement mortar 1:3 mixed with
approved make normal setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to
IS:2645.

e) Leakage test shall be conducted at terrace by storing water on the terrace for about
25mm depth continuously for a period of 7days.

Note: The above work shall be got executed by an approved applicator. In case the
Contractor proposed to execute the work by other specialized equivalent firm,
the firm should be got approved by the Owner/PMC.

13.7. TREATMENT TO SUNKEN SLAB

a) After casting the sunken slab, the surface shall be cured for required period.

b) The inner surface shall be prepared as described above under head "Surface
Preparation".

c) The prepared surface shall be plastered with 15mm thick coat using cement mortar 1:4
admixed with approved make normal setting integral waterproofing compound
conforming to IS: 2645 at 2% by weight of cement or as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.

d) Two coats of approved make acrylic polymer modified cementitious slurry coating shall
be applied over the plastered surface.

e) The surface shall then be covered with another 15mm thick plaster as described under
clause (c) above.

f) Well burnt best quality brick bats shall be laid in sunken area with C.M 1:4 admixed with
approved make normal setting integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS:2645,
at 2% by weight of cement or as per manufacturer’s recommendation.

g) The top shall be finished with 15mm thick plaster as described under clause (c) above.

h) Tiles shall be laid over this treated surface with base mortar.

13.8. GUARANTEE
 A guarantee for the watertight performance for the structures free from any leakage,
forming wet patches, dampness etc for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of
completion shall be given in an acceptable format to be Owner. This guarantee shall be in
legal paper in an acceptable form. The guarantee shall be enforceable by the Owner. If,
during the guarantee period, water leaks are noticed in the structure from the portions
treated by the Contractor, the same shall be rectified when called upon immediately, all at
no extra cost to the entire satisfaction of the Owner.

13.9. MODE OF MEASUREMENT

13.9.1. Basements, underground sumps and lift pits:

a). Treatment for raft slab in basement, underground sumps and lift pit – Measurements
shall be in square meter for the areas actually treated.

b). Chemical injection treatment to base slab of basement, underground sumps and lift pit -
Measurements shall be in square metre for the areas actually treated for all thickness /
depths.

c). Treatment to basement, underground water sump and lift pit side walls- Measurements
shall be in square metre for the area actually treated for all thickness.

d). Treatment to cover slab to be open to sky in the underground structures-Measurements

shall be in square metre for the plan area actually treated for all thickness.

13.9.2. Roof slab / Terrace slab:

a). Treatment of terrace roof slab-Measurements shall be in square metre for the plan area
actually treated.

b). Treatment of Parapet wall-Measurements shall be in running meter for the length of
parapet wall actually treated.

13.9.3. Toilet Sunken Slab:

Bottom: The actual area treated in square metre.

Sides: The actual area treated in square metre above the treated bottom.

Top: The actual area treated in square metre.

-------End of Section-13-----